Product Detail Manual EC

User Manual: ec

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 654 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

EC-1
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
B ENGINE
CONTENTS
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SECTION
A
EC
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 8
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 8
DTC No. Index ....................................................... 12
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 16
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER” ................................................................ 16
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
A/T .......................................................................... 16
Precaution .............................................................. 16
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 19
PREPARATION ......................................................... 20
Special Service Tools ............................................. 20
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 21
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 22
System Diagram ..................................................... 22
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 23
System Chart ......................................................... 24
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 25
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 27
Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 28
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Speed) .................................................................... 28
CAN communication .............................................. 29
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 30
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 30
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio
Adjustment ............................................................. 31
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 42
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................ 42
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 42
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 44
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 46
Introduction ............................................................ 46
Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 46
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 47
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) ... 62
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 62
OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 71
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 71
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 74
Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 76
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 77
Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 82
Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 86
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 92
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............. 96
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 96
CONSULT-II Function ...........................................105
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function .......................117
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.119
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Mode .....................................................................122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE .125
Description ............................................................125
Testing Condition ..................................................125
Inspection Procedure ............................................125
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT .......................................................................129
Description ............................................................129
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................129
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ...........130
Wiring Diagram .....................................................130
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................133
Ground Inspection ................................................138
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .139
Description ............................................................139
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................139
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................139
Wiring Diagram .....................................................140
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................141
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ........................142
Description ............................................................142
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.142
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................143
EC-2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................143
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................144
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER .145
Description ............................................................145
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.145
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................145
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................146
Wiring Diagram .....................................................147
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................150
Component Inspection ..........................................152
Removal and Installation ......................................152
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER .153
Description ............................................................153
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.153
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................153
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................154
Wiring Diagram .....................................................155
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................158
Component Inspection ..........................................160
Removal and Installation ......................................160
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR .....................................161
Component Description ........................................161
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.161
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................161
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................162
Overall Function Check ........................................163
Wiring Diagram .....................................................164
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................165
Component Inspection ..........................................168
Removal and Installation ......................................168
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .........................169
Component Description ........................................169
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.169
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................169
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................170
Wiring Diagram .....................................................171
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................172
Component Inspection ..........................................175
Removal and Installation ......................................175
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ...........................176
Component Description ........................................176
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................176
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................176
Wiring Diagram .....................................................178
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................179
Component Inspection ..........................................180
Removal and Installation ......................................180
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ..........................181
Component Description ........................................181
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................181
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................182
Wiring Diagram .....................................................183
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................184
Component Inspection ..........................................185
Removal and Installation ......................................185
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................186
Component Description ........................................186
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.186
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................186
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................187
Wiring Diagram .....................................................188
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................189
Component Inspection ..........................................192
Removal and Installation .......................................192
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ......................................193
Component Description ........................................193
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................193
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................194
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................194
Component Inspection ..........................................195
Removal and Installation .......................................195
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................196
Component Description ........................................196
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................196
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................196
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................197
Component Inspection ..........................................198
Removal and Installation .......................................198
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION .................199
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................199
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................199
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................199
Component Inspection ..........................................200
Removal and Installation .......................................200
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 .....................................201
Component Description ........................................201
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.201
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................201
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................202
Wiring Diagram .....................................................203
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................206
Component Inspection ..........................................209
Removal and Installation .......................................210
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 .....................................211
Component Description ........................................211
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.211
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................211
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................212
Overall Function Check .........................................213
Wiring Diagram .....................................................214
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................217
Component Inspection ..........................................221
Removal and Installation .......................................223
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 .....................................224
Component Description ........................................224
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.224
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................224
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................225
Overall Function Check .........................................226
Wiring Diagram .....................................................227
EC-3
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
EC
A
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 230
Component Inspection ......................................... 232
Removal and Installation ...................................... 233
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 .................................... 234
Component Description ........................................ 234
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 234
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 234
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 235
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 236
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 239
Component Inspection ......................................... 241
Removal and Installation ...................................... 242
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 .................................... 243
Component Description ........................................ 243
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 243
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 243
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 244
Overall Function Check ........................................ 244
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 246
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 249
Component Inspection ......................................... 252
Removal and Installation ...................................... 253
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION .............................................................. 254
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 254
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 254
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 256
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 258
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FUNCTION .............................................................. 262
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 262
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 262
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 264
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 266
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 270
Component Description ........................................ 270
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 270
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 270
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 272
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 273
Component Inspection ......................................... 274
Removal and Installation ...................................... 274
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 275
Component Description ........................................ 275
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 275
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 275
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 276
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 277
Component Inspection ......................................... 278
Removal and Installation ...................................... 278
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 279
Component Description ........................................ 279
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 279
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 279
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 280
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 281
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................282
Component Inspection ..........................................285
Removal and Installation ......................................285
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE .....................286
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................286
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................286
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................287
DTC P0327, P0328 KS ...........................................292
Component Description ........................................292
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................292
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................292
Wiring Diagram .....................................................293
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................294
Component Inspection ..........................................296
Removal and Installation ......................................296
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ..........................297
Component Description ........................................297
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.297
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................297
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................297
Wiring Diagram .....................................................298
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................299
Component Inspection ..........................................302
Removal and Installation ......................................302
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ........303
Component Description ........................................303
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.303
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................303
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................303
Wiring Diagram .....................................................304
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................307
Component Inspection ..........................................310
Removal and Installation ......................................310
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC-
TION ........................................................................311
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................311
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................311
Overall Function Check ........................................312
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................313
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................316
System Description ...............................................316
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................316
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................316
Overall Function Check ........................................317
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................318
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................321
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................321
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................322
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................323
Component Inspection ..........................................329
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOL-
UME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ......................330
Description ............................................................330
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.330
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................331
EC-4
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................331
Wiring Diagram .....................................................332
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................334
Component Inspection ..........................................335
Removal and Installation ......................................336
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE .....................................................................337
Component Description ........................................337
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.337
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................337
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................338
Wiring Diagram .....................................................339
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................340
Component Inspection ..........................................342
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR ..................................................................344
Component Description ........................................344
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.344
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................344
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................345
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................345
Component Inspection ..........................................346
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR ..................................................................347
Component Description ........................................347
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.347
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................347
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................348
Wiring Diagram .....................................................349
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................350
Component Inspection ..........................................352
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE
SENSOR ..................................................................353
Component Description ........................................353
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.353
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................353
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................354
Wiring Diagram .....................................................355
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................356
Component Inspection ..........................................360
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................361
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................361
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................362
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................363
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM .................369
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................369
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................370
Overall Function Check ........................................371
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................372
Component Inspection ..........................................378
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......................379
Component Description ........................................379
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................379
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................379
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................380
Removal and Installation .......................................380
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......................381
Component Description ........................................381
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................381
Overall Function Check .........................................381
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................382
Removal and Installation .......................................382
DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR .......................383
Component Description ........................................383
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................383
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................383
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................384
Removal and Installation .......................................384
DTC P0500 VSS ......................................................385
Description ............................................................385
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................385
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................385
Overall Function Check .........................................386
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................386
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM .......................................387
Description ............................................................387
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................387
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................387
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................388
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM .......................................389
Description ............................................................389
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................389
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................389
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................390
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ......................................391
Component Description ........................................391
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.391
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................391
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................391
Wiring Diagram .....................................................392
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................393
Component Inspection ..........................................395
DTC P0605 ECM .....................................................396
Component Description ........................................396
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................396
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................396
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................397
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................399
Component Description ........................................399
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................399
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................399
Wiring Diagram .....................................................400
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................401
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE ......................................................................403
Component Description ........................................403
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.403
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................403
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................403
Wiring Diagram .....................................................404
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................407
EC-5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
EC
A
Component Inspection ......................................... 409
Removal and Installation ...................................... 409
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR ............................................................ 410
Component Description ........................................ 410
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 410
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 410
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................411
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION .............................................................. 412
Description ........................................................... 412
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 412
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 412
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 413
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 414
Component Inspection ......................................... 417
Remove and Installation ....................................... 417
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY .................................................................... 418
Component Description ........................................ 418
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 418
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 418
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 418
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 420
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 421
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 423
Component Description ........................................ 423
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 423
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 423
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 424
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 425
Component Inspection ......................................... 426
Removal and Installation ...................................... 427
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 ..................................... 428
Component Description ........................................ 428
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 428
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 428
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 429
Overall Function Check ........................................ 430
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 430
Component Inspection ......................................... 432
Removal and Installation ...................................... 433
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 ..................................... 434
Component Description ........................................ 434
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 434
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 434
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 435
Overall Function Check ........................................ 436
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 436
Component Inspection ......................................... 438
Removal and Installation ...................................... 439
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ..................................... 440
Component Description ........................................ 440
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 440
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 440
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................441
Overall Function Check ........................................441
Wiring Diagram .....................................................443
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................446
Component Inspection ..........................................449
Removal and Installation ......................................450
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 .....................................451
Component Description ........................................451
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.451
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................451
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................452
Overall Function Check ........................................452
Wiring Diagram .....................................................454
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................457
Component Inspection ..........................................460
Removal and Installation ......................................461
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ....462
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................462
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................462
Overall Function Check ........................................463
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................463
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ..........................464
Description ............................................................464
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................464
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................464
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................464
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............465
Description ............................................................465
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................465
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................465
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................465
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR
A/T MODELS) .........................................................466
Description ............................................................466
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.467
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................467
Overall Function Check ........................................468
Wiring Diagram .....................................................470
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................472
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ...........................477
Component Inspection ..........................................477
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR
M/T MODELS) .........................................................478
Description ............................................................478
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.479
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................479
Overall Function Check ........................................480
Wiring Diagram .....................................................482
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................484
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ...........................489
Component Inspection ..........................................489
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................490
Component Description ........................................490
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................490
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................490
EC-6
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................491
Removal and Installation ......................................491
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................492
Component Description ........................................492
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................492
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................492
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................493
Removal and Installation ......................................493
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................494
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................494
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................494
Wiring Diagram .....................................................495
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................496
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...............................499
Description ............................................................499
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.499
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................500
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................500
Wiring Diagram .....................................................501
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................503
Component Inspection ..........................................506
Removal and Installation ......................................506
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL
VALVE .....................................................................507
Component Description ........................................507
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.507
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................507
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................508
Wiring Diagram .....................................................509
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................510
Component Inspection ..........................................512
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................514
Component Description ........................................514
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.514
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................514
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................515
Wiring Diagram .....................................................516
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................517
Component Inspection ..........................................519
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................521
Component Description ........................................521
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.521
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................521
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................522
Wiring Diagram .....................................................523
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................527
Component Inspection ..........................................537
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR .....538
Component Description ........................................538
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................538
DTC Confirmation Procedure ...............................538
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................539
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ......................................540
Component Description ........................................540
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.540
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................540
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................540
Overall Function Check .........................................541
Wiring Diagram .....................................................542
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................545
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH .................................549
Description ............................................................549
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.549
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................549
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................549
Wiring Diagram .....................................................550
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................551
Component Inspection ..........................................553
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR .........................554
Component Description ........................................554
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.554
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................554
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................555
Wiring Diagram .....................................................556
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................557
Component Inspection ..........................................559
Removal and Installation .......................................560
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR .........................561
Component Description ........................................561
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.561
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................561
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................562
Wiring Diagram .....................................................563
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................564
Component Inspection ..........................................567
Removal and Installation .......................................567
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................568
Component Description ........................................568
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.568
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................568
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................569
Wiring Diagram .....................................................570
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................571
Component Inspection ..........................................574
Removal and Installation .......................................574
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ......................................575
Component Description ........................................575
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.575
On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................575
DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................576
Wiring Diagram .....................................................577
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................578
Component Inspection ..........................................582
Removal and Installation .......................................582
IGNITION SIGNAL ..................................................583
Component Description ........................................583
Wiring Diagram .....................................................584
EC-7
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
EC
A
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 589
Component Inspection ......................................... 594
Removal and Installation ...................................... 594
INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 595
Component Description ........................................ 595
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 595
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 596
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 598
Component Inspection ......................................... 600
Removal and Installation ...................................... 600
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 601
Description ........................................................... 601
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 601
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 602
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 603
Component Inspection ......................................... 606
Removal and Installation ...................................... 606
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 607
Component Description ........................................ 607
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 608
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 609
Removal and Installation .......................................611
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 612
Description ........................................................... 612
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 612
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 612
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 613
Component Description ........................................ 613
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 613
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 614
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 618
Component Inspection ......................................... 628
ASCD INDICATOR ................................................. 629
Component Description ........................................629
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
.629
Wiring Diagram .....................................................630
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................631
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ......................632
Wiring Diagram .....................................................632
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .....................634
Description ............................................................634
Component Inspection ..........................................637
Removal and Installation ......................................638
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ......................638
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY
(ORVR) ....................................................................641
System Description ...............................................641
Diagnostic Procedure ...........................................642
Component Inspection ..........................................644
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ...............647
Description ............................................................647
Component Inspection ..........................................647
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) .649
System Description ...............................................649
Component Description ........................................651
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ....652
Fuel Pressure .......................................................652
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing .............................652
Calculated Load Value ..........................................652
Mass Air Flow Sensor ...........................................652
Intake Air Temperature Sensor .............................652
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ...................652
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater .........................652
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ..........................652
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) .......................652
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ....................652
Throttle Control Motor ...........................................653
Injector ..................................................................653
Fuel Pump ............................................................653
EC-8
INDEX FOR DTC
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
Alphabetical Index ABS00804
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×:Applicable —: Not applicable
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 1 ×AT-166
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 2 ×AT-129
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 ×EC-554
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 ×EC-554
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 ×EC-561
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 ×EC-561
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 ×EC-575
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-521
ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-514
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 1 — EC-538
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 2 ×AT-153
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 2 — EC-549
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*51×EC-139
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*52—EC-139
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 ×EC-297
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 1 ×EC-462
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 1 ×EC-462
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 ×EC-303
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 2 ×EC-303
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-490
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-492
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 2 ×EC-286
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 2 ×EC-286
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 2 ×EC-286
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 2 ×EC-286
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 2 ×EC-286
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 2 ×EC-286
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 1 ×AT-196
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 1 ×AT-201
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-396
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 2 ×EC-399
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 1 ×EC-181
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 1 ×EC-181
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 1 ×EC-193
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 ×EC-466(A/T)
EC-478(M/T)
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 2 ×AT-122
INDEX FOR DTC
EC-9
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 ×EC-410
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 ×EC-412
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 ×EC-423
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 ×EC-418
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 ×EC-418
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 2 ×EC-361
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 2 ×EC-316
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 2 ×EC-321
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 2 ×EC-344
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 2 ×EC-347
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 2 ×EC-353
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 2 ×EC-369
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 1 ×AT-186
FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 1 ×AT-191
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 2 ×EC-275
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 2 ×EC-275
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 2 ×EC-270
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 2 ×EC-379
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 2 ×EC-381
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 2 ×EC-383
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 2 ×EC-254
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 2 ×EC-254
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 2 ×EC-262
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 2 ×EC-262
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 1 ×AT-210
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 1 ×AT-205
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 ×EC-201
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 2 ×EC-211
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 ×EC-224
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 2 ×EC-428
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 2 ×EC-434
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0152 2 ×EC-201
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0153 2 ×EC-211
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0154 2 ×EC-224
HO2S1 (B2) P1163 1163 2 ×EC-428
HO2S1 (B2) P1164 1164 2 ×EC-434
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 2 ×EC-145
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 2 ×EC-145
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 2 ×EC-145
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 2 ×EC-145
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 2 ×EC-234
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 2 ×EC-243
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
EC-10
INDEX FOR DTC
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 2 ×EC-440
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 2 ×EC-451
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 2 ×EC-234
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 2 ×EC-243
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 2 ×EC-440
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 2 ×EC-451
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 2 ×EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 2 ×EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 2 ×EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 2 ×EC-153
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 1 ×AT-177
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 1 ×AT-182
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 2 ×EC-176
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 2 ×EC-176
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 2 ×EC-196
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 2 ×EC-142
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 2 ×EC-142
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 ×EC-403
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 2 ×EC-403
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 2 ×EC-387
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 2 ×EC-389
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-292
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-292
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 2 ×AT-134
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 1 ×AT-220
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 1 ×AT-215
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 1 ×EC-161
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 1 ×EC-169
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 1 ×EC-169
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 2 ×EC-286
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-62
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
No DTC Flashing*4—Flashing*4EC-63
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 —— —
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 2 ×EC-540
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 2 ×AT-112
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 2 ×EC-330
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 2 ×EC-330
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 2 ×EC-499
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 — EC-391
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 ×EC-494
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
INDEX FOR DTC
EC-11
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 2 ×AT-124
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 2 — EC-464
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 2 — EC-465
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 2 ×EC-199
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 ×EC-279
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 ×EC-279
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 ×EC-186
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 ×EC-186
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 1 ×AT-151
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 ×EC-568
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 2 ×AT-159
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 2 ×EC-311
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 2 ×EC-311
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*6P0720 0720 2 ×AT-117
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6P0500 0500 2 ×EC-385
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 2 ×EC-337
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 2 ×EC-507
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
EC-12
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC No. Index ABS00805
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ×:Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
No DTC Flashing*4NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED.
—Flashing*4EC-63
U1000 1000*5CAN COMM CIRCUIT 1 ×EC-139
U1001 1001*5CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-139
P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. —— —
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 ×EC-142
P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 2 ×EC-142
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 ×EC-145
P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1) 2 ×EC-145
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 ×EC-153
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) 2 ×EC-153
P0051 0051 HO2S1 HTR (B2) 2 ×EC-145
P0052 0052 HO2S1 HTR (B2) 2 ×EC-145
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 ×EC-153
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) 2 ×EC-153
P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 ×EC-161
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 ×EC-169
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 ×EC-169
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-176
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-176
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 ×EC-181
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 1 ×EC-181
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 ×EC-186
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 ×EC-186
P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR 1 ×EC-193
P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR 2 ×EC-196
P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN 2 ×EC-199
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) 2 ×EC-201
P0133 0133 HO2S1 (B1) 2 ×EC-211
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) 2 ×EC-224
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) 2 ×EC-234
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 ×EC-243
P0152 0152 HO2S1 (B2) 2 ×EC-201
P0153 0153 HO2S1 (B2) 2 ×EC-211
P0154 0154 HO2S1 (B2) 2 ×EC-224
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) 2 ×EC-234
INDEX FOR DTC
EC-13
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) 2 ×EC-243
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 2 ×EC-254
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 2 ×EC-262
P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 2 ×EC-254
P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 2 ×EC-262
P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR 2 ×EC-270
P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-275
P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-275
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 ×EC-279
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 ×EC-279
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE 2 ×EC-286
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-292
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-292
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-297
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 ×EC-303
P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 2 ×EC-303
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 2 ×EC-311
P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 2 ×EC-311
P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON 2 ×EC-316
P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK 2 ×EC-321
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 ×EC-330
P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 ×EC-330
P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 ×EC-337
P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 ×EC-344
P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 ×EC-347
P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN 2 ×EC-353
P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK 2 ×EC-361
P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK 2 ×EC-369
P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH 2 ×EC-379
P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 ×EC-381
P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC 2 ×EC-383
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*62×EC-385
P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM 2 ×EC-387
P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM 2 ×EC-389
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-391
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-396
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
EC-14
INDEX FOR DTC
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC 2 ×AT-112
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 ×AT-153
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*62×AT-117
P0725 0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG 2 ×AT-122
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 ×AT-124
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 2 ×AT-129
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 ×AT-134
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-399
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 ×EC-403
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 ×EC-410
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 ×EC-412
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 ×EC-418
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 ×EC-418
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 ×EC-423
P1136 1136 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 2 ×EC-403
P1143 1143 HO2S1 (B1) 2 ×EC-428
P1144 1144 HO2S1 (B1) 2 ×EC-434
P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B1) 2 ×EC-440
P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B1) 2 ×EC-451
P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 1 ×EC-462
P1163 1163 HO2S1 (B2) 2 ×EC-428
P1164 1164 HO2S1 (B2) 2 ×EC-434
P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) 2 ×EC-440
P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) 2 ×EC-451
P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 1 ×EC-462
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN 2 — EC-464
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC 2 — EC-465
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 ×EC-466(A/T)
EC-478(M/T)
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-490
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-492
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 ×EC-494
P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V 2 ×EC-499
P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE 2 ×EC-507
P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-514
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-521
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-538
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-62
P1705 1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T 1 ×AT-151
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 ×EC-540
P1716 1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC 2 ×AT-159
P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK 1 ×AT-166
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
INDEX FOR DTC
EC-15
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC 1 ×AT-177
P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN 1 ×AT-182
P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC 1 ×AT-186
P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT 1 ×AT-191
P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC 1 ×AT-196
P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN 1 ×AT-201
P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC 1 ×AT-205
P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN 1 ×AT-210
P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC 1 ×AT-215
P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT 1 ×AT-220
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 2 — EC-549
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 ×EC-554
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 ×EC-554
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 ×EC-561
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 ×EC-561
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 ×EC-568
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 ×EC-575
DTC*1
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Trip MIL lighting
up Reference page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
EC-16
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ABS008G2
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING:
●To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T ABS00808
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
●Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
●Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-65, "HAR-
NESS CONNECTOR" .
●Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
●Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system,
etc.
●Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution ABS00809
●Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
●Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
●Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned OFF.
●Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
PRECAUTIONS
EC-17
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
●Do not disassemble ECM.
●If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
●When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it
securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
●When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
●Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
●Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys-
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded
operation of ICs, etc.
●Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
●Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-96 .
●Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
●Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
●Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
●Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
●Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents.
●Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
PBIB1164E
SEC406D
PBIB0090E
MEF040D
EC-18
PRECAUTIONS
●After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func-
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com-
pleted.
●When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
●Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
●B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown
in the figure.
SEF217U
SEF348N
SEC893C
PRECAUTIONS
EC-19
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
●Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
●Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
●Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
●Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
●Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
●When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure
to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
–Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
–Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
–Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
–Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ABS0080A
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
●PG-3, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
●GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
PBIB1011E
SEF709Y
SEF708Y
EC-20
PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00002
Special Service Tools ABS0080B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
KV10117100
(J-36471-A)
Heated oxygen
sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor
with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
KV10114400
(J-38365)
Heated oxygen
sensor wrench
Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
(J-44321)
Fuel pressure gauge
kit
Checking fuel pressure
KV109E0010
(J-46209)
Break-out box
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
KV109E0080
(J-45819)
Y-cable adapter
Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester
EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester
adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and
radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT379
S-NT636
LEC642
S-NT825
S-NT826
S-NT564
PREPARATION
EC-21
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Commercial Service Tools ABS0080C
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Leak detector
i.e.: (J41416)
Locating the EVAP leak
EVAP service port
adapter
i.e.: (J41413-OBD)
Applying positive pressure through EVAP service
port
Fuel filler cap adapter
i.e.: (MLR-8382)
Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant
temperature sensor
Oxygen sensor thread
cleaner
i.e.: (J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
anti-seize lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
Anti-seize lubricant
i.e.: (PermatexTM
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907)
Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool
when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
S-NT703
S-NT704
S-NT815
S-NT705
AEM488
S-NT779
EC-22
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram ABS0080D
PBIB2287E
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-23
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Vacuum Hose Drawing ABS0080E
Refer to EC-22, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. PBIB1552E
EC-24
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
System Chart ABS0080F
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*3: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*4: This output signal is sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)
●Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●Mass air flow sensor
●Engine coolant temperature sensor
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Throttle position sensor
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
●Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
●Intake air temperature sensor
●Power steering pressure sensor
●Ignition switch
●Battery voltage
●Knock sensor
●Refrigerant pressure sensor
●Stop lamp switch
●ASCD steering switch
●ASCD brake switch
●ASCD clutch switch
●Fuel level sensor*1 *3
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
●Fuel tank temperature sensor*1
●Heated oxygen sensor 2*2
●TCM (Transmission control module)*3
●Air conditioner switch*3
●Wheel sensor*3
●Electrical load signal*3
Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injector
Electronic ignition system Power transistor
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator
On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)*4
Intake valve timing control Intake valve control solenoid valve
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay*4
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay*4
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS for EVAP system EVAP canister vent control valve
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-25
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ABS0080G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air
flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
●During warm-up
●When starting the engine
●During acceleration
●Hot-engine operation
●When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
●High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
●During deceleration
●During high engine speed operation
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Piston position
Fuel injection
& mixture ratio
control
Fuel injector
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage*3
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Air conditioner switch*2Air conditioner operation
Wheel sensor*2Vehicle speed
EC-26
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst 1 can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated oxygen
sensor 1, refer to EC-201 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel
mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst 1. Even if the switching characteris-
tics of heated oxygen sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
●Deceleration and acceleration
●High-load, high-speed operation
●Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
●Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
●High engine coolant temperature
●During warm-up
●After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
●When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic
changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
PBIB0121E
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-27
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ABS0080H
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
●At starting
●During warm-up
SEF179U
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*2
Piston position
Ignition timing
control Power transistor
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Battery Battery voltage*2
Wheel sensor*1Vehicle speed
SEF742M
EC-28
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
●At idle
●At low battery voltage
●During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control ABS0080I
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
●When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
●When cranking the engine.
●At high engine speeds.
●When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
●When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
●When engine speed is excessively low.
●When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) ABS0080J
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine
speed is over 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies
based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Air conditioner switch*1Air conditioner ON signal
Air conditioner
cut control Air conditioner relay
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Wheel sensor*1Vehicle speed
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Fuel cut con-
trol Fuel injector
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed
Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-29
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-25 .
CAN communication ABS0080K
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail.
EC-30
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check ABS0080L
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
SEF058Y
PBIB1287E
PBIB1019E
PBIB1097E
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-31
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. Check ignition timing.
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ABS0080M
PREPARATION
1. Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
●Battery
●Ignition system
●Engine oil and coolant levels
●Fuses
●ECM harness connector
●Vacuum hoses
●Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
●Fuel pressure
●Engine compression
●Throttle valve
●Evaporative emission system
2. On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF.
3. On automatic transmission equipped models, when checking idle rpm, ignition timing and mixture ratio,
checks should be carried out while shift lever is in N position.
4. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
5. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger.
6. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
SEF166Y
PBIB1655E
EC-32
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
OVERALL INSPECTION SEQUENCE
PBIB2001E
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-33
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
–Harness connectors for improper connections
–Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
–Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
–Hoses and ducts for leaks
–Air cleaner clogging
–Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
–Head lamp switch is OFF.
–Air conditioner switch is OFF.
–Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
–Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
SEF983U
SEF976U
SEF977U
EC-34
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
SEF978U
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
SEF058Y
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-35
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .
●Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
EC-36
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N or P position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
PBIB1655E
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-37
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20.
NG >> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .
●Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare the case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in N or P position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
PBIB1655E
EC-38
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
19. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is
warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 23.
NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 31.
20. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-64,
"HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
2. Start engine and run it at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),
check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 23.
NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 31.
21. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is
warmed up to normal operating temperature.), check that the
monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG (Monitor does not fluctuate.)>>GO TO 24.
NG (Monitor fluctuates less than 5 times.)>>GO TO 31.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
PBIB0120E
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
PBIB0120E
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-39
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
22. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Switch the monitored sensor from bank 1 to bank 2. Refer to EC-64, "How to Switch Monitored Sensor
From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa" .
2. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),
check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG (MIL does not come on)>>GO TO 24.
NG (MIL comes on less than 5 times)>>GO TO 31.
23. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1) HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1) terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-203, "BANK 1" .
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 1).
2. GO TO 4.
24. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 2) HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 16 and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2) terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram, EC-205, "BANK 2" .
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace harness between ECM and heated oxygen sensor 1 (bank 2).
2. GO TO 4.
25. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 26.
26. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 27.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-40
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
27. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 28.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 29.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
28. CHECK CO%
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
3. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN”
and “Qd”.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31.
NG >> GO TO 30.
29. CHECK CO%
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant
temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times
under no-load, then run engine at idle speed.
6. Check CO%.
7. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector, and then connect engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature
sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31.
NG >> GO TO 30.
30. RECONNECT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
>> GO TO 34.
Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
SEF172Y
Idle CO: 0.7 − 9.9% and engine runs smoothly.
SEF982UA
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-41
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
31. REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 32.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 33.
32. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge.
2. See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),
check that the monitor fluctuates between LEAN and RICH more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 34.
33. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2) SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Set ECM to Self-diagnostic mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor). Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO
SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
2. Switch the monitored sensor to the malfunctioning bank. Refer to EC-64, "How to Switch Monitored Sen-
sor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa" .
3. Running engine at 2,000 rpm under no-load (The engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.),
check that the MIL comes on more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 34.
34. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Check fuel pressure regulator and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-44, "Fuel Pressure Check" .
●Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-161 and EC-
169 .
●Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-595 .
●Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-
181 and EC-193 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 36.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 35.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
EC-42
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
35. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC
After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
NOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .
>> GO TO 4.
36. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
>> GO TO 4.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ABS0080N
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ABS0080O
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning ABS0080P
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
●Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
●Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
●Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
●Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
●PNP switch: ON
●Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-43
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the headlamp will not be illuminated.
●Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
●Vehicle speed: Stopped
●Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
●It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
SEF217Z
SEF454Y
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed A/T: 650±50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650±50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15±5° BTDC (in neutral position)
MBIB0238E
EC-44
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-125, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" .
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle air volume learning all over again:
●Engine stalls.
●Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check ABS0080Q
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed A/T: 650±50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650±50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing A/T: 15±5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15±5° BTDC (in neutral position)
SEC897C
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
EC-45
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
●Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because V35 models do not have fuel return system.
●Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (J-44321) to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting between fuel
damper and injector tube.
3. Connect the fuel pressure test gauge (quick connector adapter
hose) to the inline fuel quick disconnected fitting.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
8. Check the following.
●Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
●Fuel filter for clogging
●Fuel pump
●Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace.
SEF214Y
PBIB1910E
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
PBIB1662E
EC-46
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction ABS0080R
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. ×: Applicable —: Not applicable
*1: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
*2: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-76 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic ABS0080S
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL,
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable —: Not applicable
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
Emission-related diagnostic information SAE Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mode 3 of SAE J1979
Freeze Frame data Mode 2 of SAE J1979
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Mode 1 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Mode 7 of SAE J1979
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
Test values and Test limits Mode 6 of SAE J1979
Calibration ID Mode 9 of SAE J1979
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame
data
1st trip Freeze
Frame data SRT code Test value
CONSULT-II ×× × × ×—
GST ××*1×—××
ECM ××*2————
Items
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
displaying
1st trip
displaying
2nd trip
display-
ing
Blinking Lighting
up Blinking Lighting
up
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 -
P0306 is being detected ×———— — ×—
Misfire (Possible three way cata-
lyst damage) — DTC: P0300 -
P0306 is being detected
—— ×—— ×——
One trip detection diagnoses
(Refer to EC-8 .) —×—— ×———
Except above — — — ×—××—
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-47
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
Emission-related Diagnostic Information ABS0080T
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*5———EC-139
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*5—— ×EC-139
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 ————
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P0011 0011 — — ×EC-142
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P0021 0021 — — ×EC-142
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0031 0031 ×××EC-145
HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0032 0032 ×××EC-145
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 ×××EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 ×××EC-153
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0051 0051 ×××EC-145
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0052 0052 ×××EC-145
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 ×××EC-153
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 ×××EC-153
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — — EC-161
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — — EC-169
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — — EC-169
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — ×EC-176
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — ×EC-176
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — — EC-181
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — — EC-181
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — — EC-186
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — — EC-186
ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — — EC-193
IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — ×EC-196
THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — ×EC-199
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 — ××EC-201
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0133 ×××EC-211
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 — ××EC-224
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — ××EC-234
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 ×××EC-243
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0152 — ××EC-201
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0153 ×××EC-211
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0154 — ××EC-224
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 — ××EC-234
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 ×××EC-243
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — ×EC-254
EC-48
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — ×EC-262
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — ×EC-254
FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — ×EC-262
FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — ×EC-270
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — ×EC-275
FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — ×EC-275
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — — EC-279
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — — EC-279
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — ×EC-286
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — ×EC-286
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — ×EC-286
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — ×EC-286
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — ×EC-286
CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — ×EC-286
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — ×EC-286
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — ×EC-292
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — ×EC-292
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — ×EC-297
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — ×EC-303
CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 P0345 0345 — — ×EC-303
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 ×××EC-311
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 ×××EC-311
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 ×××EC-316
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 ×××EC-321
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — ×EC-330
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — ×EC-330
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — ×EC-337
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — ×EC-344
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — ×EC-347
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — ×EC-353
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — ×EC-361
EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4××EC-369
FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — ×EC-379
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — ×EC-381
FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — ×EC-383
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6P0500 0500 — — ×EC-385
ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — ×EC-387
ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — ×EC-389
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — ×EC-391
ECM P0605 0605 — — × or — EC-396
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — ×AT-112
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 — — ×AT-153
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-49
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5P0720 0720 — — ×AT-117
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 0725 — — ×AT-122
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — ×AT-124
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 — — ×AT-129
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — ×AT-134
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — ×EC-399
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 — — ×EC-403
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — — EC-410
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — — EC-412
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — — EC-418
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — — EC-418
ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — — EC-423
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 P1136 1136 — — ×EC-403
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 1143 ×××EC-428
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 1144 ×××EC-434
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 ×××EC-440
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 ×××EC-451
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — — EC-462
HO2S1 (B2) P1163 1163 ×××EC-428
HO2S1 (B2) P1164 1164 ×××EC-434
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 ×××EC-440
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 ×××EC-451
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — — EC-462
TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — ×EC-464
TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — ×EC-465
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — — EC-466(A/T)
EC-478(M/T)
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — ×EC-490
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — ×EC-492
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — — EC-494
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — ×EC-499
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — ×EC-507
ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — — EC-514
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 — — — EC-521
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 — — — EC-538
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 -
P1615 1610 - 1615 — — ×EC-62
TPV SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1705 — — — AT-151
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — ×EC-540
TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 — — ×AT-159
A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — — AT-166
I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — — AT-177
I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — — AT-182
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
EC-50
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG.
*5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
*6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates.
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-60, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-47, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/
component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and
therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the vehi-
cle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-72, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC Confir-
mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc.
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — — AT-186
FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1759 1759 — — — AT-191
D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — — AT-196
D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — — AT-201
HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — — AT-205
HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — — AT-210
LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — — AT-215
LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — — AT-220
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — ×EC-549
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — — EC-554
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — — EC-554
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — — EC-561
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — — EC-561
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — — EC-568
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — — EC-575
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
DTC*1
SRT code
Test value/
Test limit
(GST only)
1st trip DTC Reference
page
CONSULT-II
GST*2ECM*3
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-51
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
●1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
●Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if
available) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
details, see EC-109, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
PBIB0911E
Priority Items
1Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
EC-52
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-53
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
*1: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-II.
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
SRT item
(CONSULT-II indica-
tion)
Perfor-
mance Pri-
ority*1
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC
No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
EVAPORATIVE SYS-
TEM
1 EVAP control system P0442
2 EVAP control system P0456
2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441
HO2S 2 Heated oxygen sensor 1 P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1143, P1163
Heated oxygen sensor 1 P1144, P1164
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146, P1166
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147, P1167
HO2S HTR 2 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater P0031, P0032, P0051,
P0052
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038, P0057,
P0058
Self-diagnosis result
Example
Diagnosis Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
P1402 NG — NG
NG
(Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip)
DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC
(= MIL “ON”)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
EC-54
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
●The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
●The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
●When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagno-
sis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
●If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-55
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
How to Display SRT Code
WITH CONSULT-II
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with
CONSULT-II.
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set,
“INCMP” is displayed.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set.
“CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
WITH GST
Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
*1 EC-50 *2 EC-55 *3 EC-56
SEF573XA
SEF935Z
EC-56
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on EC-53, "SRT Item" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-57
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Driving Pattern
PBIB1053E
EC-58
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
●The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driv-
ing habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the
shortest.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed
within zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
●Sea level
●Flat road
●Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
●Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diag-
nosis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
●The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V).
●The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V).
●The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V).
Pattern 2:
●When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be con-
ducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
●The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4:
●Tests are performed after the engine has been operated for at least 17 minutes.
●The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-state driving.
●If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1. Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let engine idle.
2. Repeat driving pattern shown at right at least 10 times.
–During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal as steady as
possible.
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position
Set the selector lever in the D position.
Suggested Upshift Speeds for M/T Models
Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel
economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather
and individual driving habits.
SEF414S
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-59
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Suggested Maximum Speed in Each Gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the high-
est gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road condi-
tions to ensure sage operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be dis-
played on the GST screen.
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
[less than 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
For quick acceleration in low altitude
areas and high altitude areas
[over 1,219 m (4,000 ft)]:
Gear change ACCEL shift point km/h (MPH) CRUISE shift point km/h (MPH) km/h (MPH)
1st to 2nd 21 (13) 13 (8) 24 (15)
2nd to 3rd 37 (23) 26 (16) 40 (25)
3rd to 4th 48 (30) 40 (25) 64 (40)
4th to 5th 60 (37) 45 (28) 72 (45)
6th 68 (42) 53 (33) 80 (50)
Gear km/h (MPH)
1st 56 (35)
2nd 96 (60)
3rd 136 (85)
4th —
5th —
6th —
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC
Test value
(GST display) Test limit Conversion
TID CID
CATALYST
Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) P0420 01H 01H Max. 1/128
P0420 02H 81H Min. 1
Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128
P0430 04H 82H Min. 1
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128mm2
EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20mV
EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128mm2
EC-60
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individu-
ally from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip steps 2 through 4.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK”
twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
HO2S
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 1)
P0133 09H 04H Max. 16ms
P1143 0AH 84H Min. 10mV
P1144 0BH 04H Max. 10mV
P0132 0CH 04H Max. 10mV
P0134 0DH 04H Max. 1s
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (Bank 2)
P0153 11H 05H Max. 16ms
P1163 12H 85H Min. 10mV
P1164 13H 05H Max. 10mV
P0152 14H 05H Max. 10mV
P0154 15H 05H Max. 1s
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1)
P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500ms
P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10mV
P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10mV
P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2)
P0159 21H 87H Min. 10mV/500ms
P1167 22H 87H Min. 10mV
P1166 23H 07H Max. 10mV
P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV
HO2S HEATER
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) P0032 29H 08H Max. 20mV
P0031 2AH 88H Min. 20mV
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) P0052 2BH 09H Max. 20mV
P0051 2CH 89H Min. 20mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20mV
P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20mV
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20mV
P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20mV
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC
Test value
(GST display) Test limit Conversion
TID CID
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-61
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
WITH GST
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Mode 4 with GST.
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
NO TOOLS
NOTE:
If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8 ), skip step 2.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform AT-41, "HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
●If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24
hours.
●The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
–Diagnostic trouble codes
–1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
–Freeze frame data
–1st trip freeze frame data
SCIA5334E
EC-62
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
–System readiness test (SRT) codes
–Test values
–Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) ABS0080U
●If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in
the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-132, "IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM-NATS)" .
●Confirm no self-diagnostic results of IVIS (NATS) is dis-
played before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II.
●When replacing ECM, initialization of IVIS (NATS) system
and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be
carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of IVIS (NATS)
initialization and IVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual,
IVIS/NVIS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ABS0080V
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-25, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-632 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SEF543X
SEF217U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-63
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the malfunction.
MIL Flashing Without DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. EC-
64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
●Diagnostic trouble codes
●1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
●Freeze frame data
●1st trip freeze frame data
●System readiness test (SRT) codes
●Test values
●Others
Diagnostic Test
Mode
KEY and ENG.
Status
Function Explanation of Function
Mode I Ignition switch in
ON position
Engine stopped
BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine running MALFUNCTION
WARNING
This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is
detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
●Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
●One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in
ON position
Engine stopped
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
MONITOR
This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
EC-64
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
●It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
●It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
●Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)
1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
ECM will start heated oxygen sensor 1 monitoring from the bank 1 sensor.
How to Switch Monitored Sensor From Bank 1 to Bank 2 or Vice Versa
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly and then release it immediately.
2. Make sure that monitoring sensor has changed by MIL blinking as follows.
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic Test
Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
PBIB0092E
PBIB0093E
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-65
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI-
25, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-632 .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
64, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
●If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
●Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
PBIA3905E
EC-66
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
OBD System Operation Chart ABS0080W
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
●When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
●When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-46, "Two Trip Detection
Logic" .
●The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset.
●The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and
Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times
(driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
●The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
SUMMARY CHART
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-68 .
For details about patterns A and B under “Other”, see EC-70 .
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
display) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
(clear) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-67
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE
” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any mal-
functions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C)
without the same malfunction. (The
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared at
the moment OK is detected.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when
vehicle is driven once (pattern C)
without the same malfunction after
DTC is stored in ECM.
SEF392S
EC-68
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORA-
TION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
●The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
●When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
●When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal
to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
●The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above.
●The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction.
●The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
●The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EC-69
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
*1: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips,
MIL will light up.
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven
3 times (pattern B) without any mal-
functions.
*3: When the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips, the
DTC and the freeze frame data will
be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A)
without the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)
*5: When a malfunction is detected for
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and
the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after
vehicle is driven once (pattern B)
without the same malfunction.
*7: When the same malfunction is
detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.
SEF393SD
EC-70
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving Pattern A>
●The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
●The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
●The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
●The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
●The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
●The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
AEC574
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-71
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ABS0080X
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-72 .
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-74 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
MEF036D
SEF233G
SEF234G
EC-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” is other than [0] or [1t],
perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
*2 If the incident cannot be verified, per-
form EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNO-
SIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT" .
*3 If the on board diagnostic system
cannot be performed, check main
power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to EC-130, "POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND CIRCUIT" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be
detected, perform EC-129, "TROU-
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .
*5 EC-57 *6 EC-125
PBIB1043E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-73
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Description for Work Flow
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
●Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
STEP DESCRIPTION
STEP I Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
EC-73, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
STEP II
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the
(1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-60 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip)
freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-82 .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
STEP III
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
STEP IV
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st
trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip)
DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative.
The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
STEP V
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-77 .) Then perform inspections
according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-82 .)
STEP VI
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) Harness Layouts.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-96 , EC-119 .
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in
GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
STEP VII
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is
still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM
and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" and AT-39, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .)
SEF907L
EC-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
●Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
Worksheet Sample
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ABS0080Y
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139 .
MTBL0017
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-75
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1●U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
●P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
●P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor
●P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor
●P0128 Thermostat function
●P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
●P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor
●P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
●P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●P0460 P0461 P0462 Fuel level sensor
●P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
●P0605 ECM
●P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●P1229 Sensor power supply
●P1610 - P1615 NATS
●P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
●P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
2●P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
●P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
●P0132 P0133 P0134 P0152 P0153 P0154 P1143 P1144 P1163 P1164 Heated oxygen sensor 1
●P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2
●P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring
●P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
●P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve
●P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor
●P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
●P0710 P0720 P0725 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1705 P1716 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767
P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
●P1065 ECM power supply
●P1111 P1136 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
●P1122 Electric throttle control function
●P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
●P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
●P1805 Brake switch
3●P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
●P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function
●P0300 - P0306 Misfire
●P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
●P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system
●P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system
●P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
●P1148 P1168 Closed loop control
●P1211 TCS control unit
●P1212 TCS communication line
●P1564 ASCD steering switch
●P1572 ASCD brake switch
●P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
EC-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-safe Chart ABS0080Z
When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
●When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the malfunction.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102
P0103
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0117
P0118
Engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
ON or START 40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after
ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135
Throttle position sensor ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal con-
dition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1121 Electric throttle control
actuator
(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
P1122 Electric throttle control
function
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124
P1126
Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138
Accelerator pedal position
sensor
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal con-
dition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-77
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Basic Inspection ABS00810
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
–Harness connectors for improper connections
–Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
–Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
–Hoses and ducts for leaks
–Air cleaner clogging
–Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
–Headlamp switch is OFF.
–Air conditioner switch is OFF.
–Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
–Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
SEF983U
SEF976U
SEF977U
EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 6.
SEF978U
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
SEF058Y
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-79
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .
●Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-62, "IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
EC-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
PBIB1655E
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
A/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T: 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-81
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 4.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-303 .
●Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-297 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 4.
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
EC-62, "IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)" .
>> GO TO 4.
A/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T: 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
PBIB1655E
EC-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart ABS00811
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 11232 22 3 2EC-601
Fuel pressure regulator system 334444444 4 EC-44
Injector circuit 11232 22 2 EC-595
Evaporative emission system 334444444 4 EC-634
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem 334444444 41 EC-647
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-31
Electric throttle control actuator 112332222 2 2
EC-410,
EC-412
IgnitionIncorrect ignition timing adjustment33111 11 1 EC-31
Ignition circuit 11222 22 2 EC-583
Main power supply and ground circuit 22333 33 23 EC-130
Mass air flow sensor circuit
1
12
2
222 2
EC-161,
EC-169
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit
3
33 EC-181,
EC-193
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit
EC-201,
EC-211 ,
EC-224 ,
EC-428 ,
EC-434
Throttle position sensor circuit
22
EC-186,
EC-279 ,
EC-490 ,
EC-492 ,
EC-568
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-494,
EC-554 ,
EC-561 ,
EC-575
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-292
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-297
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-303
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-385
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-391
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-83
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
ECM 22333333333 EC-396,
EC-399
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
cuit 32 13223 3 EC-403
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-540
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-607
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-612
Air conditioner circuit 223333333 3 2ATC-38
VDC/TCS/ABS control unit 4 BRC-10
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel tank 5
5
FL-11
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-38
Vapor lock —
Valve deposit
5 555 55 5
—
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso-
line, Low octane) —
EC-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Air duct
55555 5
EM-16
Air cleaner EM-16
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric
throttle control actuator) 5555
EM-16
Electric throttle control actuator EM-18
Air leakage from intake manifold/
Collector/Gasket
EM-18,
EM-23
Cranking Battery 111111
1
1SC-4
Generator circuit SC-20
Starter circuit 3 SC-9
Signal plate 6 EM-110
PNP switch 4 AT-112 or
MT-12
Engine Cylinder head 55555 55 5 EM-92
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
66666 66 6
4
EM-110
Piston
Piston ring
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve
mecha-
nism
Timing chain
55555 55 5
EM-56
Camshaft EM-76
Intake valve timing control EM-56
Intake valve 3EM-92
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket 55555 55 5 EM-25, EX-
3
Three way catalyst
Lubrica-
tion Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 55555 55 5
EM-29, LU-
12 , LU-9 ,
LU-10
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-6
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-85
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
55555 55 45
CO-13,
CO-18
Thermostat 5 CO-32
Water pump CO-26
Water gallery CO-34
Cooling fan 5 CO-22
Coolant level (Low)/Contami-
nated coolant CO-10
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System —
NATS) 11 EC-62 or
BL-132
SYMPTOM
Reference
page
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location ABS00812
PBIB1792E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-87
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
PBIB1793E
EC-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB1954E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-89
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
PBIB1189E
PBIB1284E
EC-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB1794E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-91
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
PBIB1654E
EC-92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram ABS00813
A/T MODELS
TBWT0638E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-93
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TBWT0639E
EC-94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
M/T MODELS
TBWT0637E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-95
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TBWT0409E
EC-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ABS00814
ECM Terminals and Reference Value ABS00815
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind the passenger side instrument lower
panel. For this inspection, remove passenger side instrument
lower panel.
2. Remove ECM harness connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with
levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
●Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
●Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
PBIB1192E
PBIB1278E
SEC406D
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
1 B ECM ground [Engine is running]
●Idle speed Body ground
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-97
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2Y Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
Approximately 8V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
3W/R Throttle control motor relay
power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
4BR Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal is released
0 - 14V
5G Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal is fully depressed
0 - 14V
6BR/WHeated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–Engine: after warming up
–Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
10 W/G Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly
7 - 12V
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
PBIB0519E
PBIB1104E
PBIB1105E
PBIB1790E
EC-98
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
11 R/W Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly
7 - 12V
12 L/W Power steering pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
●Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V
[Engine is running]
●Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V
13 BR Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
Approximately 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
Approximately 1.1V
14 Y Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
1.0 - 4.0V
15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running]
●Idle speed Approximately 2.5V
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
PBIB1790E
PBIB1041E
PBIB1042E
PBIB1039E
PBIB1040E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-99
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
21
22
23
G
R/Y
R/B
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
24 G/B Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
Approximately 8V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
25 P/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–Engine: after warming up
–Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
32 P EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
SEC984C
SEC985C
PBIB0519E
EC-100
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
33 OR Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
1.0 - 4.0V
34 Y/G Intake air temperature sen-
sor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.
35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
40
41
42
P
R/L
R/W
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
PBIB1039E
PBIB1040E
SEC984C
SEC985C
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-101
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
45 L/Y EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
47 B Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
48 B/Y
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
49 W/L
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
51 OR Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
0.9 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 1.9V
55 R/Y Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
SEC990C
SEC991C
EC-102
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
60
61
62
PU/W
L/R
Y/R
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
0.1 - 0.4V
66 W/R Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
68 Y
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
69 R/L Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T) or 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
70 R/B Refrigerant pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
(Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 4.0V
73 Y/B Engine coolant temperature
sensor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with
engine coolant temperature.
74 L/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
SEC986C
SEC987C
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-103
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
79
80
81
GY/R
GY
G/R
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
0.1 - 0.4V
82 GY/L Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83 B/R Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
85 PU Data link connector [Ignition switch: ON]
●CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.
Approximately 5V - Battery volt-
age (11 - 14V)
86 R CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V
Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
90 BR/Y Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V
Output voltage varies with the
communication status.
98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.60V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
1.95 - 2.40V
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●ASCD steering switch: OFF Approximately 4V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●CANCEL switch: Pressed Approximately 1V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●COAST/SET switch: Pressed Approximately 2V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed Approximately 3V
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
SEC986C
SEC987C
EC-104
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
102 G/OR PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
104 G/W Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
106 BR Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
107 L/OR Fuel tank temperature sen-
sor [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Output voltage varies with fuel
tank temperature.
108 SB ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed (A/T models)
●Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are
depressed (M/T models)
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released (A/T models)
●Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully
released (M/T models)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
109 W/L Ignition switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
113 B/OR Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch: ON]
●For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
115
116
B/R
BECM ground [Engine is running]
●Idle speed Body ground
117 GY/L EVAP canister vent control
valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-105
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
CONSULT-II Function ABS00816
FUNCTION
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
●Diagnostic trouble codes
●1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
●Freeze frame data
●1st trip freeze frame data
●System readiness test (SRT) codes
●Test values
●Others
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
121 R/W Power supply for ECM
(Back-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
Diagnostic test mode Function
Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
other data monitor items can be read.
CAN diagnostic support
monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
EC-106
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUP-
PORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
MONI-
TOR
DATA
MONI-
TOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DTC*1 FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUP-
PORT
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
INPUT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ××××
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ××××
Mass air flow sensor ×××
Engine coolant temperature sensor ×××××
Heated oxygen sensor 1 ×××××
Heated oxygen sensor 2 ×××××
Vehicle speed sensor ××××
Accelerator pedal position sensor ×××
Throttle position sensor ×××
Fuel tank temperature sensor ××××
EVAP control system pressure
sensor ×××
Intake air temperature sensor ××××
Knock sensor ×
Refrigerant pressure sensor ××
Closed throttle position switch
(accelerator pedal position sensor
signal)
××
Air conditioner switch ××
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch ×××
Stop lamp switch ×××
Power steering pressure sensor ×××
Battery voltage ××
Load signal ××
Fuel level sensor ×××
ASCD steering switch ×××
ASCD brake switch ×××
ASCD clutch switch ×××
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-107
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-51 .
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to
data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near
the hood opener handle.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
OUTPUT
Injector ×× ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) ×× ×
Throttle control motor relay ×××
Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve ×××××
Air conditioner relay ××
Fuel pump relay ××××
Cooling fan relay ××××
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ××××
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ××××
EVAP canister vent control valve ×× ×××
Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve ××××
Calculated load value ×××
Item
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
WORK
SUP-
PORT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
MONI-
TOR
DATA
MONI-
TOR
(SPEC)
ACTIVE
TEST
DTC & SRT
CONFIRMATION
DTC*1 FREEZE
FRAME
DATA*2
SRT
STATUS
DTC
WORK
SUP-
PORT
PHIA0096E
MBIB0233E
EC-108
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
WORK SUPPORT MODE
Work Item
SEF995X
PBIB2308E
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ●FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR-
ING IDLING.
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
When releasing fuel pressure
from fuel line
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ●THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
When learning the idle air volume
SELF-LEARNING CONT ●THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF-
FICIENT.
When clearing the coefficient of
self-learning control value
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN
ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS.
●IGN SW “ON”
●ENGINE NOT RUNNING
●AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
●NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYS-
TEM
● FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
●WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYS-
TEM CLOSE”
●WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-
II WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRI-
ATE INSTRUCTION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY
“BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”,
EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY.
When detecting EVAP vapor leak
point of EVAP system
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-109
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*: This item is the same as that of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item ×: Applicable
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ●IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ●IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
Freeze frame data
item* Description
DIAG TROUBLE
CODE
[PXXXX]
●The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
FUEL SYS-B1 ●“Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
FUEL SYS-B2
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ●The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
or [°F] ●The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ●“Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ●“Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
●The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm] ●The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED [km/
h] or [mph] ●The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec] ●The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F] ●The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
MAIN
SIG-
NALS
Description Remarks
ENG SPEED [rpm] ××
●Indicates the engine speed computed from
the signals of the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) and camshaft position sensor
(PHASE).
●Accuracy becomes poor if engine
speed drops below the idle rpm.
●If the signal is interrupted while the
engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] ××
●The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor
is displayed.
●When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
EC-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec] ×
●“Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec-
tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior
to any learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ×
●The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback
correction factor per cycle is indicated.
●When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
●This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ×
COOLAN TEMP/S
[°C] or [°F] ××
●The engine coolant temperature (determined
by the signal voltage of the engine coolant
temperature sensor) is displayed.
●When the engine coolant temperature
sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
enters fail-safe mode. The engine cool-
ant temperature determined by the
ECM is displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V] ××
●The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 is displayed.
HO2S1 (B2) [V] ×
HO2S2 (B1) [V] ×●The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sen-
sor 2 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B2) [V] ×
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN] ××
●Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal dur-
ing air-fuel ratio feedback control:
RICH: means the mixture became “rich”, and
control is being affected toward a leaner mix-
ture.
LEAN: means the mixture became “lean”, and
control is being affected toward a rich mixture.
●After turning ON the ignition switch,
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mix-
ture ratio feedback control begins.
●When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
clamped, the value just before the
clamping is displayed continuously.
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN] ×
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
[RICH/LEAN] ×●Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after
three way catalyst is relatively large.
●When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
[RICH/LEAN] ×
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph] ××
●The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
speed signal sent from combination meter is
displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
[V] ××
●The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] ××
●The accelerator pedal position sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
●ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differ from
ECM terminal voltage signal.
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] ×
THRTL SEN 1 [V] ××
●The throttle position sensor signal voltage is
displayed.
●THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by
ECM internally. Thus, it differ from
ECM terminal voltage signal.
THRTL SEN 2 [V] ×
FUEL T/TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F] ×
●The fuel temperature (determined by the sig-
nal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sen-
sor) is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE
[°C] or [°F] ××
●The intake air temperature (determined by the
signal voltage of the intake air temperature
sensor) is indicated.
EVAP SYS PRES
[V] ×●The signal voltage of EVAP control system
pressure sensor is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL SE
[V] ×●The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is
displayed.
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] ××
●Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] com-
puted by the ECM according to the signals of
engine speed and battery voltage.
●After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
played regardless of the starter signal.
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
MAIN
SIG-
NALS
Description Remarks
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-111
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF] ××
●Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
ECM according to the accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor signal.
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF] ××
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
tioner switch as determined by the air condi-
tioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF] ××
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/
neutral position (PNP) switch signal.
PW/ST SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] ××
●[ON/OFF] condition of the power steering sys-
tem (determined by the signal voltage of the
power steering pressure sensor signal) is
indicated.
LOAD SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] ××
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-
cal load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/
or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and
lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW
[ON/OFF] ×●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW
[ON/OFF] ×●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater
fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop
lamp switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1
[msec] ×●Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
compensated by ECM according to the input
signals.
●When the engine is stopped, a certain
computed value is indicated.
INJ PULSE-B2
[msec]
IGN TIMING
[BTDC] ×●Indicates the ignition timing computed by
ECM according to the input signals.
●When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
CAL/LD VALUE [%] ●“Calculated load value” indicates the value of
the current air flow divided by peak air flow.
MASS AIRFLOW
[g·m/s]
●Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM
according to the signal voltage of the mass air
flow sensor.
PURG VOL C/V
[%]
●Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve control value computed
by the ECM according to the input signals.
●The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
INT/V TIM (B1)
[°CA] ●Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advanced
angle.
INT/V TIM (B2)
[°CA]
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] ●The control value of the intake valve timing
control solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
●The advance angle becomes larger as the
value increases.
INT/V SOL (B2) [%]
AIR COND RLY
[ON/OFF] ×
●The air conditioner relay control condition
(determined by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
MAIN
SIG-
NALS
Description Remarks
EC-112
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FUEL PUMP RLY
[ON/OFF] ×
●Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
determined by ECM according to the input
signals.
VENT CONT/V
[ON/OFF]
●The control condition of the EVAP canister
vent control valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
THRTL RELAY
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates the throttle control motor relay con-
trol condition determined by the ECM accord-
ing to the input signals.
COOLING FAN
[HI/LOW/OFF]
●The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals)
is indicated.
HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 heater determined by ECM
according to the input signals.
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
[ON/OFF] ●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM
according to the input signals.
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
[ON/OFF]
I/P PULLY SPD
[rpm]
●Indicates the engine speed computed from
the turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
[km/h] or [MPH]
●The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
speed signal sent from TCM or combination
meter is displayed.
IDL A/V LEARN
[YET/CMPLT]
●Display the condition of idle air volume learn-
ing
YET: Idle air volume learning has not been
performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already
been performed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL
[km] or [mile] ●Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
O2SEN HTR DTY
[%]
●Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
control value computed by the ECM accord-
ing to the input signals.
AC PRESS SEN
[V]
●The signal voltage from the refrigerant pres-
sure sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
●The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
speed signal sent from combination meter is
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
[km/h] or [mph] ●The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
MAIN SW
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ON/OFF
(MAIN) switch signal.
CANCEL SW
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL
switch signal.
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
MAIN
SIG-
NALS
Description Remarks
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-113
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
NOTE:
●Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
RESUME/ACC SW
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ACCEL/
RESUME switch signal.
SET SW
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from COAST/
SET switch signal.
BRAKE SW1
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD
brake switch signal, and ASCD clutch switch
signal (M/T models).
BRAKE SW2
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp
switch signal.
VHCL SPD CUT
[NON/CUT]
●Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively
high compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
LO SPEED CUT
[NON/CUT]
●Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the
ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
AT OD MONITOR
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
according to the input signal from the TCM.
●For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
played.
AT OD CANCEL
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D can-
cel signal sent from the TCM.
●For M/T models always “OFF” is dis-
played.
CRUISE LAMP
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE
lamp determined by the ECM according to the
input signals.
SET LAMP
[ON/OFF]
●Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
determined by the ECM according to the input
signals.
Voltage [V]
●Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width
measured by the probe.
●Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
be measured.
●Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
Frequency [msec],
[Hz] or [%]
DUTY-HI
DUTY-LOW
PLS WIDTH-HI
PLS WIDTH-LOW
Monitored item
[Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
MAIN
SIG-
NALS
Description Remarks
EC-114
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
Monitored item [Unit]
ECM
INPUT
SIG-
NALS
MAIN
SIG-
NALS
Description Remarks
ENG SPEED [rpm] ××
●Indicates the engine speed computed
from the signals of the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor (POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] ××
●The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor specification is displayed.
●When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
B/FUEL SCHDL
[msec] ×
●“Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
●When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] ×
●The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed-
back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated.
●When engine is running specification
range is indicated.
●This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
FUEL INJEC-
TION
●Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●Change the amount of fuel injec-
tion using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
●Harness and connectors
●Fuel injectors
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
IGNITION TIM-
ING
●Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●Timing light: Set
●Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM. ●Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
POWER BAL-
ANCE
●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine.
●A/C switch: OFF
●Shift lever: N
●Cut off each injector signal one at
a time using CONSULT-II.
Engine runs rough or dies.
●Harness and connectors
●Compression
●Fuel injectors
●Power transistor
●Spark plugs
●Ignition coils
COOLING FAN*
●Ignition switch: ON
●Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II.
Cooling fan moves and stops.
●Harness and connectors
●Cooling fan motor
●IPDM E/R
ENG COOLANT
TEMP
●Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●Change the engine coolant tem-
perature using CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
●Harness and connectors
●Engine coolant temperature sen-
sor
●Fuel injectors
FUEL PUMP
RELAY
●Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
●Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
Fuel pump relay makes the operat-
ing sound.
●Harness and connectors
●Fuel pump relay
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-115
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-52, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" .
SRT Work Support Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC Work Support Mode
*: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to V35 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens.
PURG VOL
CONT/V
●Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
●Change the EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
Engine speed changes according to
the opening percent.
●Harness and connectors
●Solenoid valve
FUEL/T TEMP
SEN ●Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
VENT CON-
TROL/V
●Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
●Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
“OFF” with the CONSULT-II and
listen to operating sound.
Solenoid valve makes an operating
sound.
●Harness and connectors
●Solenoid valve
V/T ASSIGN
ANGLE
●Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
●Change intake valve timing using
CONSULT-II.
If trouble symptom disappears, see
CHECK ITEM.
●Harness and connectors
●Intake valve timing control sole-
noid valve
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
EVAPORATIVE SYS-
TEM
PURGE FLOW P0441
Refer to corresponding
trouble diagnosis for
DTC.
EC-316
EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-321
EVAP V/S SML LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-369
PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-499
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-211
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 EC-224
HO2S1 (B1) P1143 EC-428
HO2S1 (B1) P1144 EC-434
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 EC-211
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 EC-224
HO2S1 (B2) P1163 EC-428
HO2S1 (B2) P1164 EC-434
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-243
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-440
HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-451
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-243
HO2S2 (B2) P1166 EC-440
HO2S2 (B2) P1167 EC-451
EC-116
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)
Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
●The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
●DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF705Y
SEF707X
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-117
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
●While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
●While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS in GI-26, "How to Perform Effi-
cient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
●If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ABS00817
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has
8 different functions explained below.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
PBIB0197E
SEF139P
EC-118
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTION
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector, which is located under LH
dash panel near the hood opener handle.
Diagnostic test mode Function
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs
and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA)
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during
the freeze frame. For details, refer toEC-51, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP
FREEZE FRAME DATA" .
MODE 3 DTCs This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored
by ECM.
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
●Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
●Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
●Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
●Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
●Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
●Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS) This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific com-
ponents/systems that are not continuously monitored.
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS)
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related pow-
ertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving condi-
tions.
MODE 8 —
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When
this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
●EVAP canister vent control valve open
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
●Low ambient temperature
●Low battery voltage
●Engine running
●Ignition switch OFF
●Low fuel temperature
●Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID) This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such
as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
PHIA0096E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-119
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-
dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
the tool maker.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00818
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
SEF398S
SEF416S
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED ●Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica-
tion.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication
MAS A/F SE-B1
●Engine: After warming up
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●No-load
Idle Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V
2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V
B/FUEL SCHDL
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
A/F ALPHA-B1
A/F ALPHA-B2 ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm 54% - 155%
COOLAN TEMP/S ●Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
●Warm-up condition
●After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds
EC-120
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
●Warm-up condition
●After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH
VHCL SPEED SE ●Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT ●Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
ACCEL SEN1 ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V
ACCEL SEN2* ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
EVAP SYS PRES ●Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
START SIGNAL ●Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
CLSD THL POS ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
AIR COND SIG ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.) ON
P/N POSI SW ●Ignition switch: ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
(Forward direction) OFF
Steering wheel is turned. ON
LOAD SIGNAL ●Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF. OFF
IGNITION SW ●Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
HEATER FAN SW ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Heater fan is operating. ON
Heater fan is not operating OFF
BRAKE SW ●Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
IGN TIMING
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 13° - 18° BTDC
2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
CAL/LD VALUE
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 5% - 35%
2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-121
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
MASS AIRFLOW
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
PURG VOL C/V
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 0%
2,000 rpm —
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle −5° - 5°CA
When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly Approx. 0° - 30°CA
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 0% - 2%
When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
AIR COND RLY ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates) ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
●For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●Engine running or cranking ON
●Except above conditions OFF
VENT CONT/V ●Ignition switch: ON OFF
THRTL RELAY ●Ignition switch: ON ON
COOLING FAN
●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
(212°F) or more HI
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
●Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
–Engine: After warming up
–Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
●Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
I/P PULLY SPD ●Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12MPH) Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication
VEHICLE SPEED ●Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
TRVL AFTER MIL ●Ignition switch: ON Vehicle has traveled after MIL has
turned ON.
0 - 65,535 km
(0 - 40,723 mile)
O2SEN HTR DTY ●Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80°C (176°F)
●Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm Approx. 40%
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EC-122
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from
ECM terminals voltage signal.
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ABS00819
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with shift lever in D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position.
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
AC PRESS SEN
●Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
●Engine: Idle
●Air conditioner switch: OFF 1.0 - 4.0V
VHCL SPEED SE ●Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer
indication.
Almost the same speed as the
speedometer indication
SET VHCL SPD ●Engine: Running ASCD: Operating The preset vehicle speed is
displayed.
MAIN SW ●Ignition switch: ON ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed ON
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Released OFF
CANCEL SW ●Ignition switch: ON CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACC SW ●Ignition switch: ON ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed ON
ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released OFF
SET SW ●Ignition switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
BRAKE SW1 ●Ignition switch: ON
Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake pedal:
Fully released ON
Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or brake pedal:
Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 ●Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
CRUISE LAMP ●Ignition switch: ON ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed at
the 1st time → at the 2nd time ON → OFF
SET LAMP
●ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: ON
●When vehicle speed is between
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h
(89MPH)
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PBIB0198E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC-123
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and
“INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine suffi-
ciently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
SEF241Y
EC-124
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB0668E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
EC-125
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
Description ABS0081A
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
●B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
●A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
●MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition ABS0081B
●Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)
●Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
●Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
●Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
●Transmission: Warmed-up*1
●Electrical load: Not applied*2
●Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF
TEMP 1” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
Inspection Procedure ABS0081C
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-126, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z
EC-126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0081D
SEF613ZD
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
EC-127
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
SEF768Z
EC-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
SEF615ZA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
EC-129
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
Description ABS0081E
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-
rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may
not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the
specific malfunctioning area.
Common I/I Report Situations
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0081F
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-26, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Refer to GI-23, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Con-
tact Spring of Terminal”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Repair or replace connector.
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t].
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
EC-130
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram ABS0081G
TBWT0640E
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-131
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
109 W/L Ignition switch
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-132
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
TBWT0641E
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-133
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0081H
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
1 B ECM ground [Engine is running]
●Idle speed Body ground
115
116
B/R
BECM ground [Engine is running]
●Idle speed Body ground
Voltage: Battery voltage
MBIB0015E
EC-134
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-583, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB2192E
Continuity should exist.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1915E
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-135
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO
18.
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 12.
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness or connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
PBIB1630E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1191E
Continuity should exist.
EC-136
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E9.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness or connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
15. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB2192E
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-137
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> GO TO 17.
17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness or connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness connectors.
18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16 .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
EC-138
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Ground Inspection ABS00AML
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti-
cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even
when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
●Remove the ground bolt or screw.
●Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
●Clean as required to assure good contact.
●Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
●Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
●If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one
eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" .
PBIB1870E
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
EC-139
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description ABS0081I
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0081J
*1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
*2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0081K
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-141, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
U1000*1
1000*1CAN communication
line
●ECM cannot communicate to other control
units.
●ECM cannot communicate for more than the
specified time.
●Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
U1001*2
1001*2
EC-140
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Wiring Diagram ABS0081L
TBWT0255E
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
EC-141
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0081M
Go to LAN-2, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II"
EC-142
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
Description ABS0081N
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
*: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0081O
Specification data are reference values.
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Intake valve
timing control
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed
PBIB1102E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
INT/V TIM (B1)
INT/V TIM (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle −5° - 5°CA
When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly Approx. 0° - 30°CA
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 0% - 2%
When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
EC-143
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0081P
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0081Q
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
●If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P1111 or P1136, first perform trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1111 or P1136. Refer to EC-403 .
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive sec-
onds.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
6. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.
7. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name Detecting condition Possible cause
P0011
0011
(Bank 1) Intake valve timing
control performance
There is a gap between angle of target and
phase-control angle degree.
●Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
portion of the camshaft
P0021
0021
(Bank 2)
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function.
VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED 2,000 - 4,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S 60 - 120°C (140 - 248°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 7.26 msec
Selector lever A/T models: D position
M/T models: 5th position
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)
COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105°C (158 - 221°F)
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving location uphill
Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
SEF353Z
EC-144
DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0081R
1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following.
●Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
●Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-298 for CKP sensor (POS), EC-304 and EC-306 for CMP sensor (PHASE).
>> INSPECTION END
SEC905C
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
EC-145
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
Description ABS0081S
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine speed
and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is
started.
OPERATION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0081T
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0081U
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant tempera-
ture
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up ON
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
HO2S1 HTR (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
●Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0031
0031
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater
control circuit low
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal
range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1
heater.)
●Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
●Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0051
0051
(Bank 2)
P0032
0032
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater
control circuit high
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal
range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1
heater.)
●Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
shorted.)
●Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
P0052
0052
(Bank 2)
EC-146
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0081V
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-150, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
EC-147
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0081W
BANK 1
TBWT0642E
EC-148
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
24 G/B Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
Approximately 8V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PBIB0519E
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
EC-149
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0643E
EC-150
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0081X
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
2Y Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
Approximately 8V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PBIB0519E
PBIB2192E
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
EC-151
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●15A fuse
●Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1285E
PBIB0969E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0031, P0032 24 3 1
P0051, P0052 2 3 2
Continuity should exist.
EC-152
DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 HO2S1 HEATER
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0081Y
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0081Z
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞ Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
4 and 1, 2, 3
PBIB0970E
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
EC-153
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER PFP:226A0
Description ABS00820
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00821
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00822
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant tempera-
ture
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
●Engine: After warming up
●Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 HTR (B1)
HO2S2 HTR (B2)
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
–Engine: After warming up
–Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and
at idle for 1 minute under no load
ON
●Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0037
0037
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater
control circuit low
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen-
sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)
●Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
●Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0057
0057
(Bank 2)
P0038
0038
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen
sensor 2 heater
control circuit high
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sen-
sor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater.)
●Harness or connectors
(The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is
shorted.)
●Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0058
0058
(Bank 2)
EC-154
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00823
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm
and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-158, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF176Y
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
EC-155
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS00824
BANK 1
TBWT0644E
EC-156
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
25 P/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–Engine: after warming up
–Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
EC-157
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0645E
EC-158
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00825
1. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
6BR/WHeated oxygen sensor 2
heater (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the
following conditions are met.
–Engine: after warming up
–Keeping the engine speed between 3,500
and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load.
0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PBIB1284E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0969E
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
EC-159
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●15A fuse
●Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Refer to EC-160, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0037, P0038 25 3 1
P0057, P0058 6 3 2
Continuity should exist.
EC-160
DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
Component Inspection ABS00826
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows.
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS00827
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞ Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
4 and 1, 2, 3
PBIB0970E
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
EC-161
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description ABS00828
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00829
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0082A
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
PBIB1604E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAS A/F SE-B1
●Engine: After warming up
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●No-load
Idle Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V
2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V
CAL/LD VALUE
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 5% - 35%
2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
MASS AIRFLOW
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0101
0101
Mass air flow sensor cir-
cuit range/performance
problem
A) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under light load driving condition.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Mass air flow sensor
B) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
under heavy load driving condition.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Intake air leaks
●Mass air flow sensor
EC-162
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0082B
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first.
If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
NOTE:
If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead
of running engine at idle speed.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”.
5. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed
increases.
If NG, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
SEF174Y
SEF243Y
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
EC-163
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive sec-
onds.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check ABS0082C
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MODE 1” with GST.
3. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with “MODE 1”.
4. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in
response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5. If NG, go to EC-165, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V
THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help
maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
PBIB0199E
SEF534P
EC-164
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS0082D
TBWT0646E
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
EC-165
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0082E
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated?
A or B
A>>GO TO 3.
B>>GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
●Air duct
●Vacuum hoses
●Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
51 OR Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
0.9 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 1.9V
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-166
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB2192E
PBIB1077E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1168E
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
EC-167
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-168, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-168
DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR
Component Inspection ABS0082F
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
●Turn ignition switch OFF.
●Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
●Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation ABS0082G
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.9
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB1106E
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
EC-169
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description ABS0082H
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot
wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0082I
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0082J
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
PBIB1604E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAS A/F SE-B1
●Engine: After warming up
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●No-load
Idle Approx. 0.9 - 1.2V
2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 1.9V
CAL/LD VALUE
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 5% - 35%
2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
MASS AIRFLOW
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0102
0102
Mass air flow sensor
circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●Intake air leaks
●Mass air flow sensor
P0103
0103
Mass air flow sensor
circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●Mass air flow sensor
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
EC-170
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0082K
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
SEF058Y
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
EC-171
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0082L
TBWT0646E
EC-172
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0082M
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.
●Air duct
●Vacuum hoses
●Intake air passage between air duct and intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
51 OR Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
0.9 - 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
1.6 - 1.9V
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
EC-173
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor
●Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
PBIB2192E
PBIB1077E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1168E
EC-174
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
EC-175
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS0082N
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
●Turn ignition switch OFF.
●Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
●Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot wire for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation ABS0082O
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to
normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.9
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB1106E
EC-176
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description ABS0082P
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0082Q
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0082R
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-179, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
PBIB1604E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349
SEF012P
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0112
0112
Intake air tempera-
ture sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM. ●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●Intake air temperature sensor
P0113
0113
Intake air tempera-
ture sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
SEF058Y
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
EC-177
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
EC-178
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS0082S
TBWT0263E
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
EC-179
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0082T
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and
ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB2192E
PBIB1077E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB1169E
Continuity should exist.
EC-180
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-180, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0082U
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and
6 under the following conditions.
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
Removal and Installation ABS0082V
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
EC-181
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description ABS0082W
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0082X
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
SEF594K
Engine coolant temperature
°C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis
Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117
0117
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir-
cuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM. ●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118
0118
Engine coolant tem-
perature sensor cir-
cuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine coolant temper-
ature sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
START 80°C (176°F)
Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.
EC-182
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0082Y
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-184, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
EC-183
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0082Z
TBWT0647E
EC-184
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00830
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB2192E
PBIB0993E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0080E
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
EC-185
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-185, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS00831
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Removal and Installation ABS00832
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-34, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .
Continuity should exist.
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
EC-186
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS00833
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00834
Specification data are reference values.
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00835
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
PBIB0145E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0122
0122
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
P0123
0123
Throttle position sensor
2 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sen-
sor 2 is sent to ECM.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
EC-187
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00836
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-189, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-188
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS00837
TBWB0072E
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
EC-189
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00838
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 B Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
66 W/R Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
69 R/L Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
PBIB2192E
EC-190
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0995E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0082E
Continuity should exist.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-188
91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-563
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
EC-191
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-192, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-192
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection ABS00839
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T) or 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
7. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation ABS0083A
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released More than 0.36V
Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
Fully released Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed More than 0.36V
PBIB1170E
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
EC-193
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description ABS0083B
NOTE:
If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or
P0118. Refer to EC-181 .
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 73
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0083C
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
SEF594K
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0125
0125
Insufficient engine cool-
ant temperature for
closed loop fuel control
●Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not
practical, even when some time has passed
after starting the engine.
●Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for
closed loop fuel control.
●Harness or connectors
(High resistance in the circuit)
●Engine coolant temperature sensor
●Thermostat
EC-194
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0083D
CAUTION:
Be careful not to overheat engine.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F)
within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will
be OK.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-194, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0083E
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-195, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF174Y
PBIB2192E
DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR
EC-195
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine
coolant does not flow.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-32, "WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY"
.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Refer to EC-183, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0083F
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Removal and Installation ABS0083G
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-34, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
EC-196
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description ABS0083H
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0083I
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0083J
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road
test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F)
a. Turn ignition switch ON.
PBIB1604E
Intake air temperature
°C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349
SEF012P
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0127
0127
Intake air temperature
too high
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal
from engine coolant temperature sensor.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Intake air temperature sensor
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
EC-197
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
b. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
c. Check the engine coolant temperature.
d. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F),
turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine.
●Perform the following steps before engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 90°C (194°F).
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine.
5. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 con-
secutive seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0083K
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-180, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Refer to EC-178, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
SEF189Y
PBIB2192E
EC-198
DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR
Component Inspection ABS0083L
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi-
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
Removal and Installation ABS0083M
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
EC-199
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION PFP:21200
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0083N
Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long
enough.
This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0083O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher.
●For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-32 . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replace-
ment. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F).
If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step.
If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1.
5. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-199, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0083P
1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-200, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0128
0128 Thermostat function
The engine coolant temperature does not
reach to specified temperature even though
the engine has run long enough.
●Thermostat
●Leakage from sealing portion of thermo-
stat
●Engine coolant temperature sensor
VHCL SPEED SE 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH)
EC-200
DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION
Component Inspection ABS0083Q
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Removal and Installation ABS0083R
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to CO-34, "WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING" .
PBIB2005E
Engine coolant
temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
EC-201
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description ABS0083S
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0083T
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0083U
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
SEF463R
SEF288D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
SEF301UA
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0132
0132
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
1 circuit high voltage
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
P0152
0152
(Bank 2)
EC-202
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0083V
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-206, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF174Y
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
EC-203
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0083W
BANK 1
TBWT0649E
EC-204
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
EC-205
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0650E
EC-206
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0083X
1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
>> GO TO 2.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
PBIB1284E
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
EC-207
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1285E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0132 35 1 1
P0152 16 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0132 35 1 1
P0152 16 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
EC-208
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-209, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Water should not exist.
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
EC-209
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS0083Y
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check the following.
●“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF646Y
SEF647Y
SEF648Y
EC-210
DTC P0132, P0152 HO2S1
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
●The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
●The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
●The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0083Z
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1107E
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-211
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description ABS00840
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00841
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00842
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1, this diagnosis
measures response time of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal. The time
is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback
control constant, and heated oxygen sensor 1 temperature index.
Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
SEF463R
SEF288D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
SEF010V
EC-212
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00843
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
●Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P0133” or “HO2S1 (B2) P0153” of “HO2S1” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 20 to 50 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0133
0133
(Bank 1)
Heated oxygen sensor
1 circuit slow response
The response of the voltage signal from the
sensor takes more than the specified time.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Fuel pressure
●Injectors
●Intake air leaks
●Exhaust gas leaks
●PCV valve
●Mass air flow sensor
P0153
0153
(Bank 2)
SEF338Z
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,100 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 80 km/h (50 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 12.0 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
SEF339Z
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-213
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-217, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
Overall Function Check ABS00844
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
–The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
4. If NG, go to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF658Y
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2
times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
→ 0 - 0.3V
PBIB1107E
EC-214
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram ABS00845
BANK 1
TBWT0649E
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-215
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-216
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
BANK 2
TBWT0650E
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-217
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00846
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
>> GO TO 3.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
PBIB1284E
EC-218
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
3. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PBIB1165E
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-219
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or DTC P0172, P0175 (Refer to EC-254 or EC-
262 ).
No >> GO TO 6.
SEF968Y
PBIB1077E
EC-220
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
6. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1285E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0133 35 1 1
P0153 16 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0133 35 1 1
P0153 16 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-221
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-175, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
9. CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-647, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace PCV valve.
10. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-221, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS00847
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
EC-222
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
6. Check the following.
●“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF647Y
SEF648Y
DTC P0133, P0153 HO2S1
EC-223
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
●The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
●The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
●The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS00848
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1107E
EC-224
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description ABS00849
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0084A
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0084B
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is
not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF463R
SEF288D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
SEF237U
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0134
0134
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
1 circuit no activity
detected
The voltage from the sensor is constantly
approx. 0.3V.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
P0154
0154
(Bank 2)
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
EC-225
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0084C
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “HO2S1 (B1) P0134” or “HO2S1 (B2) P0154” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 4.
5. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 10 to 60 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-230, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
PBIB0544E
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 12.0 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PBIB0545E
SEC750C
EC-226
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Overall Function Check ABS0084D
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
–The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
4. If NG, go to EC-230, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1107E
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
EC-227
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0084E
BANK 1
TBWT0649E
EC-228
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
35 W/B Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
EC-229
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0650E
EC-230
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0084F
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
16 LG Heated oxygen sensor 1
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
(Periodically change)
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
EC-231
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-232, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1285E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0134 35 1 1
P0154 16 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0134 35 1 1
P0154 16 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
EC-232
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0084G
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check the following.
●“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
SEF646Y
SEF647Y
SEF648Y
DTC P0134, P0154 HO2S1
EC-233
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
●The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
●The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
●The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0084H
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1107E
EC-234
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description ABS0084I
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the
oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0084J
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0084K
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the
various driving condition such as fuel cut.
SEF327R
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
●Warm-up condition
●After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF305UA
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0138
0138
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit high voltage
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0158
0158
(Bank 2)
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
EC-235
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0084L
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-239, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF174Y
EC-236
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram ABS0084M
BANK 1
TBWT0651E
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
EC-237
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
74 L/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-238
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
BANK 2
TBWT0652E
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
EC-239
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0084N
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
55 R/Y Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
EC-240
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1284E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0138 74 1 1
P0158 55 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
EC-241
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-241, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0084O
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
Water should not exist.
SEF174Y
SEF662Y
EC-242
DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
(A/T), 4th (M/T) gear position.
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0084P
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB0796E
PBIB1607E
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
EC-243
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description ABS0084Q
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the
oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0084R
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0084S
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition
such as fuel-cut.
SEF327R
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
●Warm-up condition
●After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF302U
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0139
0139
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
2 circuit slow response
It takes more time for the sensor to respond
between rich and lean than the specified time.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 2
●Fuel pressure
●Injectors
●Intake air leaks
P0159
0159
(Bank 2)
EC-244
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0084T
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
8. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
9. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check ABS0084U
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
SEF174Y
PBIB0115E
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
EC-245
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
(A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 sec-
ond during this procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-249, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1607E
EC-246
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram ABS0084V
BANK 1
TBWT0651E
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
EC-247
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
74 L/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-248
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
BANK 2
TBWT0652E
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
EC-249
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0084W
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
55 R/Y Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
EC-250
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-254 or EC-262 .
No >> GO TO 3.
SEF968Y
PBIB1077E
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
EC-251
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1284E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0139 74 1 1
P0159 55 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
EC-252
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-252, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0084X
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF174Y
SEF662Y
PBIB0796E
DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2
EC-253
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
(A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0084Y
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1607E
EC-254
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0084Z
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00850
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine
starts, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not
start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel injection
control Fuel injector
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0171
0171
(Bank 1)
Fuel injection system
too lean
●Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
●Intake air leaks
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Injector
●Exhaust gas leaks
●Incorrect fuel pressure
●Lack of fuel
●Mass air flow sensor
●Incorrect PCV hose connection
P0174
0174
(Bank 2)
SEF968Y
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-255
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
PBIB1077E
EC-256
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram ABS00851
BANK 1
TBWT0653E
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-257
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0654E
EC-258
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00852
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PBIB1165E
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-259
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
6. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-601 .)
●Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-45 .)
●Fuel lines
●Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0171 35 1 1
P0174 16 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0171 35 1 1
P0174 16 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
Continuity should exist.
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
EC-260
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-161, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-595, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
PBIB0133E
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-261
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
8. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel splays out from injectors on
bank 1.
For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel splays out from injectors on
bank 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
PBIB1726E
EC-262
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00853
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The
ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00854
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage,
if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine
does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Heated oxygen sensors 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel injection
control Fuel injector
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0172
0172
(Bank 1) Fuel injection system
too rich
●Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
●The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Injector
●Exhaust gas leaks
●Incorrect fuel pressure
●Mass air flow sensor
P0175
0175
(Bank 2)
SEF968Y
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-263
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then
restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Select “MODE 3” with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
6. Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the DTC P0102.
7. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
8. Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go
to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction.
10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-266, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and
check for fouling, etc.
PBIB1077E
EC-264
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram ABS00855
BANK 1
TBWT0653E
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-265
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0654E
EC-266
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00856
1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PBIB1165E
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-267
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S1 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
6. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to, EC-601 .)
●Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-45 .)
>> Repair or replace.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0172 35 1 1
P0175 16 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P0172 35 1 1
P0175 16 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
Continuity should exist.
At idling: 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
EC-268
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-161, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for EC-595, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
PBIB0133E
Clicking noise should be heard.
PBIB1986E
DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
EC-269
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
8. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-270
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description ABS00857
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00858
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00859
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
If the result is NG, go to EC-273, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the result is OK, go to following step.
4. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will
be OK.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following
step.
5. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C
(140°F).
6. Wait at least 10 seconds.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-273, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB0994E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
SEF012P
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0181
0181
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit range/
performance
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM, compared with the voltage sig-
nals from engine coolant temperature sensor
and intake air temperature sensor.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Fuel tank temperature sensor
SEF174Y
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
EC-271
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-272
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS0085A
TBWT0455E
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
EC-273
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0085B
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connector.
PBIB2192E
PBIB0994E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0932E
EC-274
DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR
4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0085C
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Removal and Installation ABS0085D
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Continuity should exist.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
EC-275
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description ABS0085E
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tempera-
ture inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from
the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temper-
ature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
<Reference data>
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107
(Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0085F
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0085G
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-277, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB0994E
Fluid temperature
°C (°F)
Voltage*
V
Resistance
kΩ
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
SEF012P
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0182
0182
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM. ●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●Fuel tank temperature sensor
P0183
0183
Fuel tank temperature
sensor circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
SEF174Y
EC-276
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS0085H
TBWT0455E
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
EC-277
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0085I
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
>> Repair harness or connector.
PBIB2192E
PBIB0994E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0932E
EC-278
DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR
4. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 5 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground.
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
6. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0085J
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove fuel level sensor unit.
2. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
terminals 4 and 5 by heating with hot water or heat gun as
shown in the figure.
Removal and Installation ABS0085K
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Continuity should exist.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
PBIB0931E
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
EC-279
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS0085L
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0085M
Specification data are reference values.
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0085N
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode an the MIL lights up.
PBIB0145E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0222
0222
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit low input
An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
1 is sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
P0223
0223
Throttle position sensor
1 circuit high input
An excessively high voltage from the TP sen-
sor 1 is sent to ECM.
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-280
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0085O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-282, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
EC-281
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0085P
TBWB0073E
EC-282
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0085Q
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 B Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
66 W/R Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
69 R/L Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
PBIB2192E
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
EC-283
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0995E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0082E
Continuity should exist.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-281
91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-563
EC-284
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-285, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
EC-285
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS0085R
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
7. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation ABS0085S
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released More than 0.36V
Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
Fully released Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed More than 0.36V
PBIB1170E
EC-286
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE PFP:00000
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0085T
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the first trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to over-
heating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0085U
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0300
0300
Multiple cylinder misfire
detected Multiple cylinder misfire. ●Improper spark plug
●Insufficient compression
●Incorrect fuel pressure
●The injector circuit is open or shorted
●Fuel injector
●Intake air leak
●The ignition signal circuit is open or
shorted
●Lack of fuel
●Signal plate
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Incorrect PCV hose connection
P0301
0301
No.1 cylinder misfire
detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
P0302
0302
No. 2 cylinder misfire
detected No. 2 cylinder misfires.
P0303
0303
No. 3 cylinder misfire
detected No. 3 cylinder misfires.
P0304
0304
No. 4 cylinder misfire
detected No. 4 cylinder misfires.
P0305
0305
No. 5 cylinder misfire
detected No. 5 cylinder misfires.
P0306
0306
No. 6 cylinder misfire
detected No. 6 cylinder misfires.
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
EC-287
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-287, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
NOTE:
If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing
the following procedure is advised.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time.
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0085V
1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace it.
PBIB0164E
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature
(T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F).
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F).
Engine speed Time
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
EC-288
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
Without CONSULT-II
When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time,
is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine
speed drop?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> GO TO 7.
4. CHECK INJECTOR
Does each injector make an operating sound at idle?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-595,
"INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .
PBIB0133E
PBIB0997E
PBIB1986E
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
EC-289
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Remove ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
2. Remove spark plug from ignition coil assembly
3. Connect a known good spark plug to the ignition coil.
4. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
5. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits.
Refer to EC-583, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
6. CHECK SPARK PLUGS
Remove the spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace spark plug(s) with standard type
one(s). For spark plug type, refer to, MA-17, "Changing
Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type)" .
7. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-92, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
8. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
SEF575Q
SEF156I
Standard: 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm
Minimum: 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm
Difference between each
cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm
At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)
EC-290
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-601, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .)
●Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-45, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .)
●Fuel lines
●Fuel filter for clogging
>> Repair or replace.
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Follow the EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
11. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 (BANK 1)/(BANK 2)
Refer to EC-209, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
12. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in MODE 1 with GST.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-161, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" .
13. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-82, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Items Specifications
Target idle speed A/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec: at idling
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MIS-
FIRE
EC-291
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
14. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
>> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-292
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
Component Description ABS0085W
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine
knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0085X
The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0085Y
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-294, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB0998E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detected condition Possible cause
P0327
0327
Knock sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM. ●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●Knock sensor
P0328
0328
Knock sensor circuit
high input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
SEF058Y
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
EC-293
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0085Z
TBWT0656E
EC-294
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00860
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F37, F229
●Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EC-296, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
15 W Knock sensor [Engine is running]
●Idle speed Approximately 2.5V
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
Continuity should exist.
PBIB0998E
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
EC-295
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F37, F229
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB2192E
Continuity should exist.
EC-296
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Component Inspection ABS00861
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
Removal and Installation ABS00862
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-110, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
SEF111Y
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
EC-297
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
Component Description ABS00863
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00864
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00865
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00866
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-299, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB0562E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED ●Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica-
tion.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0335
0335
Crankshaft position
sensor (POS) circuit
●The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not detected by the ECM during the first
few seconds of engine cranking.
●The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
while the engine is running.
●The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
is not in the normal pattern during engine
running.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
●Signal plate
SEF058Y
EC-298
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Wiring Diagram ABS00867
TBWT0657E
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
EC-299
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00868
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
13 BR Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
Approximately 1.2V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
Approximately 1.1V
PBIB1041E
PBIB1042E
PBIB2192E
EC-300
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
●Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1279E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0664E
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
EC-301
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
EC-302
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Inspection ABS00869
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Removal and Installation ABS0086A
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EM-29, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" .
PBIB0563E
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
Except 0 or ∞1 (+) - 3 (-)
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
EC-303
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description ABS0086B
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of
intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00950
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0086C
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0086D
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-307, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-307, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB0562E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ENG SPEED ●Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica-
tion.
Almost the same speed as the
tachometer indication.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0340
0340
(Bank 1)
Camshaft position sen-
sor (PHASE) circuit
●The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking.
●The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
during engine running.
●The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
●Camshaft (Intake)
●Starter motor (Refer to SC-9 .)
●Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-9 .)
●Dead (Weak) battery
P0345
0345
(Bank 2)
SEF058Y
EC-304
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Wiring Diagram ABS0086E
BANK 1
TBWT0658E
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
EC-305
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
33 OR Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
1.0 - 4.0V
PBIB1039E
PBIB1040E
EC-306
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
BANK 2
TBWT0659E
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
EC-307
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0086F
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)
2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
14 Y Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
1.0 - 4.0V
PBIB1039E
PBIB1040E
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
PBIB2192E
EC-308
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
●Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1000E
SEF481Y
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
EC-309
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 33 or 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following.
●Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
●Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
SEC905C
EC-310
DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Inspection ABS0086G
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Removal and Installation ABS0086H
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EM-76, "CAMSHAFT" .
PBIB0563E
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-)
Except 0 or ∞1 (+) - 3 (-)
2 (+) - 3 (-)
PBIB0564E
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
EC-311
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION PFP:20905
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0086I
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2.
A three way catalyst 1 with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxy-
gen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will
increase.
When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensors 1 and 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst 1 malfunction is diagnosed.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0086J
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
PBIB1166E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0420
0420
(Bank 1)
Catalyst system effi-
ciency below threshold
●Three way catalyst 1 does not operate prop-
erly.
●Three way catalyst 1 does not have enough
oxygen storage capacity.
●Three way catalyst 1
●Exhaust tube
●Intake air leaks
●Fuel injector
●Fuel injector leaks
●Spark plug
●Improper ignition timing
P0430
0430
(Bank 2)
SEF189Y
EC-312
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecu-
tive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely.
If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12.
10. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until
“INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take
approximately 5 minutes).
If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C
(158°F) and then retest from step 1.
12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected.
If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-313, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
Overall Function Check ABS0086K
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst 1. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
3. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
4. Open engine hood.
5. Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals 35 [HO2S1
(bank 1) signal], 16 [HO2S1 (bank 2) signal] and ground, and
ECM terminals 74 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 55 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal] and ground.
6. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no load.
SEF940Z
SEF941Z
SEF535Z
PBIB1107E
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
EC-313
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high & low)
between ECM terminals 74 and ground, or 55 and ground is
very less than that of ECM terminals 35 and ground, or 16 and
ground.
Switching frequency ratio = A/B
A: Heated oxygen sensor 2 voltage switching frequency
B: Heated oxygen sensor 1 voltage switching frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way catalyst 1
does not operate properly. Go to EC-313, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
NOTE:
If the voltage at terminal 35 or 16 does not switch periodically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 7,
perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P0133, P0153” first. (See EC-211 .)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0086L
1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PBIB1108E
PBIB1165E
EC-314
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
Check the following items. Refer to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
5. CHECK INJECTORS
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-596 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Perform EC-598, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
6. CHECK IGNITION SPARK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from rocker cover.
3. Connect a known-good spark plug to the ignition coil assembly.
4. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
5. Place end of spark plug against a suitable ground and crank engine.
6. Check for spark.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check ignition coil with power transistor and their circuit.
Refer to EC-583, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .
Items Specifications
Target idle speed A/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position)
M/T 650 ± 50 rpm (in neutral position)
Ignition timing A/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position)
M/T 15 ± 5° BTDC (in neutral position)
Battery voltage should exist.
PBIB1172E
SEF575Q
DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
EC-315
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove injector assembly.
Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
3. Reconnect all injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END
Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly.
EC-316
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950
System Description ABS0086M
NOTE:
If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform
trouble diagnosis for other DTC.
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions.
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP con-
trol system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0086N
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0086O
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
PBIB1026E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0441
0441
EVAP control system
incorrect purge flow
EVAP control system does not operate prop-
erly, EVAP control system has a leak between
intake manifold and EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor.
●EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve stuck closed
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●Loose, disconnected or improper con-
nection of rubber tube
●Blocked rubber tube
●Cracked EVAP canister
●EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve circuit
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
●Blocked purge port
●EVAP canister vent control valve
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-317
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds.
4. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain
the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
318, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Overall Function Check ABS0086P
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds.
5. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system
pressure sensor signal) and ground.
6. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed
and note it.
7. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1
minute.
8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (mea-
sured at step 6) for at least 1 second.
Selector lever Suitable position
Vehicle speed 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH)
ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.3 - 9.0 msec
Engine coolant temperature 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
PBIB0826E
Air conditioner switch ON
Headlamp switch ON
Rear window defogger switch ON
Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position Any position other than P, N or R
PBIB1109E
EC-318
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
9. If NG, go to EC-318, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0086Q
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
2. CHECK PURGE FLOW
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm.
5. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG
VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK PURGE FLOW
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP ser-
vice port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORA-
TIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum gauge indication when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
6. Release the accelerator pedal fully and let idle.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PURG VOL CONT/V Vacuum
100% Should exist.
0% Should not exist.
PBIB0147E
Vacuum should exist.
Vacuum should not exist.
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-319
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair it.
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT
1. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B .
2. Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C .
3. Check that air flows freely.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port.
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
SEF367U
SEF368U
PBIB0147E
EC-320
DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION
Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-348 , P0453 EC-354 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace it.
13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Water should not exist.
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-321
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0086R
This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold
vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0442
0442
EVAP control system
small leak detected
(negative pressure)
EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP
control system does not operate prop-
erly.
●Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●Leak is in line between intake manifold and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve.
●Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent
control valve.
●EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●Fuel tank temperature sensor
●O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is
missing or damaged
●Water separator
●EVAP canister is saturated with water
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
●Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●ORVR system leaks
PBIB1026E
EC-322
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
CAUTION:
●Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0086S
NOTE:
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F)
5. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve properly.
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of Driving Pattern on EC-57 before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" .
PBIB0829E
SEC763C
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-323
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Select “MODE 1” with GST.
●If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
●If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7. Drive vehicle again according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" .
8. Stop vehicle.
9. Select “MODE 3” with GST.
●If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-318 .
●If P0441 and P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step.
10. Select “MODE 1” with GST.
●If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
●If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0086T
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-637, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
SEF915U
EC-324
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
PBIB1001E
SEF916U
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-325
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PEF917U
SEF200U
EC-326
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.
8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-329, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-638, "Removal and Installation" .
●EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
PBIB1002E
SEF200U
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-327
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●EVAP canister for damage
●EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1031E
PBIB0147E
EC-328
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 21.
Vacuum should exist.
DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-329
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
21. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-641, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
22. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
23. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-645, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-15, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008GD
WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
●Do not disassemble water separator.
PBIB1032E
EC-330
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE PFP:14920
Description ABS0086U
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
*1:ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0086V
Specification data are reference values.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor*2Vehicle speed
SEF337U
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 0%
2,000 rpm —
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
EC-331
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0086W
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0086X
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0444
0444
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
open
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
●Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
●EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
P0445
0445
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
shorted
An excessively high voltage signal is sent
to ECM through the valve
●Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.)
●EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
SEF058Y
EC-332
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Wiring Diagram ABS0086Y
TBWT0660E
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
EC-333
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
45 L/W EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEC990C
SEC991C
EC-334
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0086Z
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
●Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1001E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0148E
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
EC-335
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS00870
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
PBIB0147E
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Condition Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2 Yes
No supply No
PBIB0150E
EC-336
DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Removal and Installation ABS00871
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-337
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935
Component Description ABS00872
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00873
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00874
SEF381Z
PBIB1002E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V ●Ignition switch: ON OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0447
0447
EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve circuit open
An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM
through EVAP canister vent control valve.
●Harness or connectors
(The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
●EVAP canister vent control valve
EC-338
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00875
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-339
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS00876
TBWT0661E
EC-340
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00877
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON.
2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen.
4. Check for operating sound of the valve.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
117 GY/L EVAP canister vent control
valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PBIB0151E
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-341
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve termi-
nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E106, B2
●Harness connectors B108, B201
●Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1002E
PBIB0152E
Continuity should exist.
EC-342
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS00878
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
PBIB1033E
DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-343
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
5. Perform step 3 again.
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
PBIB0151E
PBIB1033E
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2 No
OFF Yes
PBIB1034E
EC-344
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
Component Description ABS00879
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0087A
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0087B
NOTE:
If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-494 .
PBIB1002E
PBIB1207E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES ●Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0451
0451
EVAP control system
pressure sensor perfor-
mance
ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP
control system pressure sensor
●Harness or connectors
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-345
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0087C
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds.
NOTE:
Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-345, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0087D
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
SEF194Y
PBIB2192E
EC-346
DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-346, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For wiring diagram, refer to EC-349 .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0087E
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
●Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
●Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Water should not exist.
PBIB1002E
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg) Voltage V
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
PBIB1173E
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-347
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:25085
Component Description ABS0087F
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0087G
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0087H
NOTE:
If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-494 .
PBIB1002E
PBIB1207E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES ●Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0452
0452
EVAP control system
pressure sensor low
input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
EC-348
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0087I
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5. Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-350, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
PBIB1110E
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-349
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0087J
TBWT0662E
EC-350
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0087K
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
32 P EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48 B/Y
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
Water should not exist.
PBIB1002E
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-351
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0138E
Continuity should exist.
EC-352
DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0087L
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
●Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
●Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Continuity should exist.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg) Voltage V
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
PBIB1173E
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-353
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:25085
Component Description ABS0087M
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the
ECM increases as pressure increases.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0087N
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0087O
NOTE:
If DTC P0453 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-494 .
PBIB1002E
PBIB1207E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
EVAP SYS PRES ●Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0453
0453
EVAP control system
pressure sensor high
input
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
●EVAP canister vent control valve
●EVAP canister
●Water separator
●Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent
control valve to water separator
EC-354
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0087P
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that “FUEL T/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F).
6. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
7. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank tem-
perature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds.
5. Select “MODE 7” with GST.
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
SEF194Y
PBIB1110E
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-355
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0087Q
TBWT0662E
EC-356
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0087R
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
32 P EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V
48 B/Y
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
Water should not exist.
PBIB1002E
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-357
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor
terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal
67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0138E
Continuity should exist.
EC-358
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal
2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors B201, B108
●Harness connectors B1, M12
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent and kinked.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube.
10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-360, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
12. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace water separator.
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-359
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
13. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> GO TO 16.
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●EVAP canister for damage
●EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB1031E
EC-360
DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Inspection ABS0087S
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
2. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
●Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
●Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or
pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg).
4. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
Applied vacuum kPa
(mmHg, inHg) Voltage V
Not applied 1.8 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value
PBIB1173E
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-361
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0087T
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
CAUTION:
●Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0455
0455
EVAP control system
gross leak detected
EVAP control system has a very large leak
such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control sys-
tem does not operate properly.
●Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to
close.
●Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●Leak is in line between intake manifold
and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve.
●Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister
vent control valve.
●EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube)
leaks
●EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
●Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●EVAP canister vent control valve and the
circuit
●EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve and the circuit
●Fuel tank temperature sensor
●O-ring of EVAP canister vent control
valve is missing or damaged.
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
●Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●ORVR system leaks
PBIB1026E
EC-362
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
●Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0087U
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
NOTE:
●Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
properly.
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is
placed on flat level surface.
●Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Make sure that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
6. Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to
EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and
make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it
is displayed, refer to EC-363, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If P0442 is displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for DTC
P0442 EC-323, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
NOTE:
Be sure to read the explanation of EC-57, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" .
PBIB0829E
SEC763C
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-363
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. Stop vehicle.
4. Select “MODE 1” with GST.
●If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the following step.
●If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7. Drive vehicle again according to EC-57, "Driving Pattern" .
8. Stop vehicle.
9. Select “MODE 3” with GST.
●If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-363, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
●If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure, for DTC P0442, EC-323 .
●If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0441, EC-318 .
●If P0455, P0441, P0442 are not displayed on the screen, go to the following step.
10. Select “MODE 1” with GST.
●If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
●If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0087V
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-637, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
SEF915U
EC-364
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or
disconnection.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-638, "Removal and Installation" .
●EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely.
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the
EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10.
PBIB1001E
SEF916U
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-365
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PEF917U
SEF200U
EC-366
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair or replace.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
PBIB1002E
SEF200U
PBIB0828E
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-367
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
Vacuum should exist.
PBIB0828E
EC-368
DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-641, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-645, "REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-369
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14950
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0087W
This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak
diagnosis.
If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected.
If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected.
If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK.
PBIB1026E
EC-370
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
CAUTION:
●Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
●If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
●Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0087X
NOTE:
●If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456.
●After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly.
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Open engine hood before conducting following procedure.
●If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehi-
cle for more than 1 hour.
–Fuel filler cap is removed.
–Refilled or drained the fuel.
–EVAP component parts is/are removed.
●Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0456
0456
Evaporative emission
control system very
small leak (negative
pressure check)
●EVAP system has a very small leak.
●EVAP system does not operate prop-
erly.
●Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
●Incorrect fuel filler cap used
●Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
●Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
●Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
●Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve.
●EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
●EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
●EVAP purge line rubber tube bent
●Loose or disconnected rubber tube
●EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
●EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve and the circuit
●Fuel tank temperature sensor
●O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is miss-
ing or damaged
●Water separator
●EVAP canister is saturated with water
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
●Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve
●ORVR system leaks
●Fuel level sensor and the circuit
●Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-371
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure the following conditions are met.
FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F)
FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F)
INT A/TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F)
If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining
fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave
the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1).
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
Follow the instruction displayed.
6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-372, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
NOTE:
●If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go
to EC-77, "Basic Inspection" .
●Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve properly.
Overall Function Check ABS0087Y
WITH GST
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
CAUTION:
●Never use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system.
●Do not start engine.
●Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi).
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
PBIB0837E
PBIB1001E
EC-372
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
2. Set the pressure pump and a hose.
3. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Connect GST and select mode 8.
6. Using mode 8 control the EVAP canister vent control valve
(close).
7. Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are sat-
isfied.
Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg)
Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP
system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and
the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg).
If NG, go to EC-372, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to next step.
8. Disconnect GST.
9. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
11. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds.
12. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds.
13. Turn ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
For more information, refer to GST instruction manual.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0087Z
1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap.
2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION
Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower.
2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard.
3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION
Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF462UI
SEF915U
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-373
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
Refer to EC-637, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one.
5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP
To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pres-
sure pump to EVAP service port securely. For the location of EVAP
service port, refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE
DRAWING" .
NOTE:
Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking.
With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7.
PBIB1001E
SEF916U
EC-374
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
NOTE:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pres-
sure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING"
.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.
PEF917U
SEF200U
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-375
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts
until the end of test.)
3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg),
then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter.
NOTE:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak
detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer
to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or replace.
8. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace water separator.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Check the following.
●EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly.
Refer to EC-638, "Removal and Installation" .
●EVAP canister vent control valve.
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring.
PBIB1002E
SEF200U
EC-376
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●EVAP canister for damage
●EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL
CONT/V” opening to 100%.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to
2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
PBIB1031E
PBIB0147E
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
EC-377
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK VACUUM HOSE
Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-23, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
16. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
17. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-274, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
18. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
19. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 20.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
20. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower.
>> GO TO 21.
Vacuum should exist.
EC-378
DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM
21. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE
Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper con-
nection. For location, refer to EC-641, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 22.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
22. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE
Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and
improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube.
23. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 24.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
24. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to DI-15, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit.
25. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008GF
WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
●Do not disassemble water separator.
PBIB1032E
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-379
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description ABS00880
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00881
NOTE:
If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139 .
When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the
fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunc-
tion is detected.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00882
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB1011E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0460
0460
Fuel level sensor circuit
noise
Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal
being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor
to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Combination meter
●Fuel level sensor
SEF195Y
EC-380
DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00883
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-13, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation ABS00884
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-381
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description ABS00885
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00886
NOTE:
If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139 .
Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level.
This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has
been driven.
Overall Function Check ABS00887
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-11,
"FUEL TANK" .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required.
WITH CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/
8 Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON.
6. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
PBIB1011E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0461
0461
Fuel level sensor circuit
range/performance
The output signal of the fuel level sensor does
not change within the specified range even
though the vehicle has been driven a long dis-
tance.
●Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Combination meter
●Fuel level sensor
EC-382
DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
7. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
8. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-
II.
9. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-
5/8 Imp gal) and stop it.
10. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
11. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
12. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it.
13. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during
step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12.
If NG, go to EC-382, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
NOTE:
Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8
Imp gal) in advance.
1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose.
2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit.
4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment.
7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal).
9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies.
10. If NG, go to EC-382, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00888
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-13, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation ABS00889
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
SEF195Y
DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
EC-383
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR PFP:25060
Component Description ABS008EV
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The
sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to
the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level
sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is vari-
able resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on
the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008EW
NOTE:
If DTC P0462 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139 .
This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008EX
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition
switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-384, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB1011E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0462
0462
Fuel level sensor circuit
low input
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Combination meter
●Fuel level sensor
SEF195Y
EC-384
DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008EY
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE OPERATION
Refer to DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Follow the instruction of DI-9, "Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter" .
2. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR AND CIRCUIT
Refer to DI-13, "Inspection/Fuel Level Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation ABS008EZ
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
DTC P0500 VSS
EC-385
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Description ABS008F0
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the VDC/TCS/ABS control unit by CAN com-
munication line. The combination meter then sends the signal to the ECM by CAN communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008F1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008F2
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
If NG, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0500
0500 Vehicle speed sensor
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from
vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM
even when vehicle is being driven.
●Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted)
●Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
shorted)
●Wheel sensor
●Combination meter
●VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
ENG SPEED 1,600 - 6,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 5.3 - 31.8 msec (A/T)
5.0 - 31.8 msec (M/T)
Selector lever Except P or N position (A/T)
Except Neutral position (M/T)
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF SEF196Y
EC-386
DTC P0500 VSS
Overall Function Check ABS008F3
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
4. If NG, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008F4
1. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
2. COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
EC-387
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781
Description ABS008F5
NOTE:
If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008F6
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008F7
NOTE:
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-42 ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service
Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-652 .
TESTING CONDITION:
●Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Open engine hood.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-388, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0506
0506
Idle speed control sys-
tem RPM lower than
expected
The idle speed is less than the target idle
speed by 100 rpm or more.
●Electric throttle control actuator
●Intake air leak
SEF174Y
EC-388
DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008F8
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
EC-389
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM PFP:23781
Description ABS008F9
NOTE:
If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC.
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let
into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is
varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects
the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value
memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily.
The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions,
such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan
operation, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008FA
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008FB
NOTE:
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
●If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform Idle Air Volume Learning, EC-42 ,
before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the Service
Data and Specifications (SDS), EC-652 .
TESTING CONDITION:
●Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
●Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Open engine hood.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-390, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0507
0507
Idle speed control sys-
tem RPM higher than
expected
The idle speed is more than the target idle
speed by 200 rpm or more.
●Electric throttle control actuator
●Intake air leak
●PCV system
SEF174Y
EC-390
DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008FC
1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION
Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Discover air leak location and repair.
3. REPLACE ECM
1. Stop engine.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
EC-391
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description ABS008FD
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008FE
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008FF
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-494 .
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008FG
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-393, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB1281E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PW/ST SIGNAL ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
(Forward direction) OFF
Steering wheel is turned. ON
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0550
0550
Power steering pres-
sure sensor circuit
An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor is sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Power steering pressure sensor
EC-392
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS008FH
TBWT0663E
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
EC-393
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008FI
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
12 L/W Power steering pressure
sensor
[Engine is running]
●Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V
[Engine is running]
●Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V
67 B/W
Sensor ground
(Mass air flow sensor / IAT
sensor / Power steering
pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
68 Y
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor / EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor)
[Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
PBIB2192E
EC-394
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR
Refer to EC-395, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.
PBIB1281E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0188E
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
EC-395
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008FJ
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.5V
Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0126E
EC-396
DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
Component Description ABS008FK
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008FL
This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008FM
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB1164E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P0605
0605 Engine control module
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
●ECMB) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A
●ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
degrees) by the return spring.
●ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
SEF058Y
DTC P0605 ECM
EC-397
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008FN
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-396 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MODE 4” with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-396 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
SEF058Y
SEF058Y
EC-398
DTC P0605 ECM
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
EC-399
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Component Description ABS008FO
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008FP
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008FQ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-401, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB1164E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1065
1065
ECM power supply cir-
cuit
ECM back-up RAM system does not function
properly.
●Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.]
●ECM
SEF058Y
EC-400
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram ABS008FR
TBWT0664E
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
EC-401
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008FS
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●15A fuse
●Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
121 R/W Power supply for ECM
(Back-up) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Voltage: Battery voltage
MBIB0026E
EC-402
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-399 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
With GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MODE 4“ with GST.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-399 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of IVIS (NATS) system and registration of all IVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
BL-134, "ECM Re-communicating Function" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-403
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
Component Description ABS0088A
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0088B
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0088C
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0088D
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-407, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Following the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB1842E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
INT/V SOL (B1)
INT/V SOL (B2)
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 0% - 2%
When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly Approx. 0% - 50%
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1111
1111
(Bank 1) Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve circuit
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.
●Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
●Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P1136
1136
(Bank 2)
SEF058Y
EC-404
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram ABS0088E
BANK 1
TBWT0665E
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-405
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
11 R/W Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly
7 - 12V
PBIB1790E
EC-406
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
BANK 2
TBWT0666E
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-407
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0088F
1. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
10 W/G Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve (bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●When revving engine up to 2,500 rpm
quickly
7 - 12V
PBIB1790E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0988E
PBIB0192E
EC-408
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness connectors F18, F201
●IPDM E/R harness connector E7
●Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 11 (bank 1) or 10 (bank 2) and intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F18, F201
●Harness for open and short between ECM and intake valve timing control solenoid valve
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-409, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
DTC P1111, P1136 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-409
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS0088G
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals as follows.
Removal and Installation ABS0088H
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-56, "TIMING CHAIN" .
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5Ω at 20°C (68°F)
1 or 2 and ground ∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)
PBIB0193E
EC-410
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS0088I
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0088J
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0088K
NOTE:
●Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
●If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T), and
wait at least 3 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
7. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T), and
wait at least 3 seconds.
8. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T).
9. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-411, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1121
1121
Electric throttle control
actuator
A)
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
●Electric throttle control actuator
B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
not in specified range.
C) ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Malfunction A ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
SEF058Y
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
EC-411
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T), 1st position (M/T), and
wait at least 3 seconds.
4. Shift selector lever to N or P position (A/T), Neutral position (M/
T).
5. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-411, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0088L
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
SEF058Y
PBIB1015E
EC-412
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description ABS0088M
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or
P1126. Refer to EC-410 or EC-418 .
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0088N
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0088O
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine
is running.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-414, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1122
1122
Electric throttle control
performance problem
Electric throttle control function does not oper-
ate properly.
●Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or
shorted)
●Electric throttle control actuator
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
SEF058Y
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
EC-413
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0088P
TBWT0667E
EC-414
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0088Q
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
3W/R Throttle control motor relay
power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
4BR Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal is released
0 - 14V
5G Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal is fully depressed
0 - 14V
104 G/W Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
PBIB1104E
PBIB1105E
PBIB2192E
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
EC-415
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the
following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8.
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
ON Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0028E
Continuity should exist.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1171E
EC-416
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E9.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal ECM terminal Continuity
35 Should not exist
4 Should exist
65 Should exist
4 Should not exist
PBIB0995E
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
EC-417
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
11. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-417, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
14. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0088R
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation ABS0088S
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
PBIB1015E
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
PBIB0095E
EC-418
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
Component Description ABS0088T
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0088U
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0088V
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0088W
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. If DTC is detected, go to EC-421, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL RELAY ●Ignition switch: ON ON
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1124
1124
Throttle control motor
relay circuit short
ECM detects the throttle control motor relay is
stuck ON.
●Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
shorted)
●Throttle control motor relay
P1126
1126
Throttle control motor
relay circuit open
ECM detects a voltage of power source for
throttle control motor is excessively low.
●Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is
open)
●Throttle control motor relay
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
SEF058Y
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
EC-419
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-421, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-420
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Wiring Diagram ABS0088X
TBWT0668E
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
EC-421
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0088Y
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E9.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
3W/R Throttle control motor relay
power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
104 G/W Throttle control motor relay [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1171E
Continuity should exist.
EC-422
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
4. CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15A fuse.
2. Check 15A fuse for blown.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace 15A fuse.
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8.
4. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
ON Battery voltage
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0028E
Continuity should exist.
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
EC-423
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS0088Z
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00890
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS00891
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-425, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1128
1128
Throttle control motor
circuit short
ECM detects short in both circuits between
ECM and throttle control motor.
●Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
●Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
SEF058Y
EC-424
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Wiring Diagram ABS00892
TBWT0669E
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
EC-425
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS00893
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
4BR Throttle control motor
(Close)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal is released
0 - 14V
5G Throttle control motor
(Open)
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal is fully depressed
0 - 14V
PBIB1104E
PBIB1105E
PBIB2192E
EC-426
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-426, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS00894
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
4. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
5. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Electric throttle control
actuator terminal ECM terminal Continuity
35 Should not exist
4 Should exist
65 Should exist
4 Should not exist
PBIB0995E
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
PBIB0095E
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
EC-427
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Removal and Installation ABS00895
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
EC-428
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description ABS00896
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS00897
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS00898
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunction will be detected.
SEF463R
SEF288D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
SEF300U
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1143
1143
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
1 lean shift monitoring
The maximum and minimum voltage from the
sensor are not reached to the specified volt-
ages.
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
●Fuel pressure
●Injector
●Intake air leaks
P1163
1163
(Bank 2)
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
EC-429
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0094P
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
●Before performing following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1143” of “HO2S1” or “HO2S1 (B2) P1163” of “HO2S1”
in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 40 seconds or more.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-430, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
PBIB0546E
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 12.0 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PBIB0547E
SEC769C
EC-430
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Overall Function Check ABS0094Q
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
●The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is over 0.1V at least one time.
4. If NG, go to EC-430, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0089B
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1.
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1107E
PBIB2192E
Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
PBIB1284E
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
EC-431
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174. Refer to EC-254 .
No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-432, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For circuit, refer to EC-203, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
SEF968Y
PBIB1077E
EC-432
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
Component Inspection ABS0089C
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check the following.
●“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF646Y
SEF647Y
SEF648Y
DTC P1143, P1163 HO2S1
EC-433
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
●The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
●The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
●The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0089D
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1107E
EC-434
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description ABS0089E
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It
detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1 to 0V.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0089F
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0089G
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sensor
1 is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is sufficiently
high and “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the outputs are
shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be detected.
SEF463R
SEF288D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) ●Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
rpm
LEAN ←→ RICH
Changes more than 5 times
during 10 seconds.
SEF299U
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1144
1144
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
1 rich shift monitoring
The maximum and minimum voltages from the
sensor are beyond the specified voltages.
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
●Fuel pressure
●Injector
P1164
1164
(Bank 2)
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
EC-435
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0094R
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
●Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “HO2S1 (B1) P1144” or “HO2S1 (B2) P1164” of “HO2S1” in “DTC
WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Touch “START”.
5. Start engine and let it idle for at least 3 minutes.
NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm after this step. If
the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to step 5.
6. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be dis-
played on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions con-
tinuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will
take approximately 40 seconds or more.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from
step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-436, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
PBIB0548E
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,600 rpm
Vehicle speed Less than 100 km/h (62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 - 12.0 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PBIB0549E
SEC772C
EC-436
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
Overall Function Check ABS0094S
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1(B1) signal] 16 [HO2S1(B2) signal] and ground.
3. Check one of the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm
constant under no load.
●The maximum voltage is below 0.8V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is below 0.35V at least one time.
4. If NG, go to EC-436, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0089J
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
2. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1107E
PBIB2192E
Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
PBIB1284E
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
EC-437
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-262 .
No >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
SEF968Y
PBIB1077E
Water should not exist.
PBIB1285E
EC-438
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
6. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EC-438, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
For circuit, refer to EC-203, "Wiring Diagram" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0089K
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the following steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
6. Check the following.
●“HO2S1 MNTR (B1)/(B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF646Y
SEF647Y
DTC P1144, P1164 HO2S1
EC-439
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and
ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
●The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
●The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
●The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
●The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 -
0.3V
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0089L
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
SEF648Y
PBIB1107E
EC-440
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description ABS0089M
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the
oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0089N
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0089O
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity of the three way catalyst causes the longer switch-
ing time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM
monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low
during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF327R
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
●Warm-up condition
●After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ←→ RICH
SEF972Z
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1146
1146
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
2 minimum voltage
monitoring
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 2
●Fuel pressure
●Injector
P1166
1166
(Bank 2)
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
EC-441
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0089P
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check ABS0089Q
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
SEF174Y
PBIB0818E
EC-442
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this
procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-446, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1607E
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
EC-443
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0089R
BANK 1
TBWT0651E
EC-444
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
74 L/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
EC-445
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
BANK 2
TBWT0652E
EC-446
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0089S
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
55 R/Y Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
EC-447
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-262 .
No >> GO TO 3.
SEF968Y
PBIB1077E
EC-448
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1284E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P1146 74 1 1
P1166 55 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P1146 74 1 1
P1166 55 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
EC-449
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-449, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS0089T
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF174Y
SEF662Y
PBIB0796E
EC-450
DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS0089U
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1607E
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
EC-451
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 PFP:226A0
Component Description ABS0089V
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst 1, monitors the
oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner condi-
tions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0089W
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0089X
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1. The oxygen
storage capacity before the three way catalyst causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF327R
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
●Warm-up condition
●After keeping engine speed
between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for
1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load.
Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly.
0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B2) LEAN ←→ RICH
PBIB0820E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1147
1147
(Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor
2 maximum voltage
monitoring
The maximum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.
●Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
●Heated oxygen sensor 2
●Fuel pressure
●Injector
●Intake air leaks
P1167
1167
(Bank 2)
EC-452
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0089Y
NOTE:
If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C
(158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN
TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II.
10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-457, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following.
a. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
b. Return to step 1.
Overall Function Check ABS0089Z
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
SEF174Y
PBIB0819E
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
EC-453
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not nec-
essary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this
procedure.
8. If NG, go to EC-457, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1607E
EC-454
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
Wiring Diagram ABS008A0
BANK 1
TBWT0651E
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
EC-455
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
74 L/B Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
EC-456
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
BANK 2
TBWT0652E
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
EC-457
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008A1
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
55 R/Y Heated oxygen sensor 2
(bank 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm
quickly after the following conditions are
met.
–After keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle
for 1 minute under no load.
0 - Approximately 1.0V
78 B/Y Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
PBIB2192E
EC-458
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness con-
nector.
5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed.
6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-60, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed.
8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
Yes or No
Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-254 .
No >> GO TO 3.
SEF968Y
PBIB1077E
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
EC-459
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between HO2S2 terminal 4 and ECM terminal 78.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1284E
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P1147 74 1 1
P1167 55 1 2
Continuity should exist.
DTC Terminals Bank
ECM Sensor
P1147 74 1 1
P1167 55 1 2
Continuity should not exist.
EC-460
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EC-460, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008A2
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II.
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.63V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.48V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF174Y
SEF662Y
PBIB0796E
DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2
EC-461
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 74 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 55 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and
ground.
6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load
at least 10 times.
(Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.)
The voltage should be above 0.63V at least once during this
procedure.
If the voltage is above 0.63V at step 6, step 7 is not neces-
sary.
7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or
check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D
position (A/T), 4th gear position (M/T).
The voltage should be below 0.48V at least once during this
procedure.
8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
●Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
●Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation ABS008A3
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
Refer to EM-25, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB1607E
EC-462
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL PFP:22690
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008A4
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS0094T
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
●Never raise engine speed above 3,600 rpm during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. If the engine
speed limit is exceeded, retry the procedure from step 2.
●Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check one of the following.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go above 0.70V at least
once.
●“HO2S1 (B1)/(B2)” voltage should go below 0.21V at least
once.
If the check result is NG, perform EC-463, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
4. Let engine idle at least 5 minutes.
5. Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive sec-
onds.
During this test, P0132 and/or P0152 may be displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1148
1148
(Bank 1) Closed loop control
function
The closed loop control function for bank 1
does not operate even when vehicle is driving
in the specified condition.
●The heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit is
open or shorted.
●Heated oxygen sensor 1
●Heated oxygen sensor heater
P1168
1168
(Bank 2)
The closed loop control function for bank 2
does not operate even when vehicle is driving
in the specified condition.
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.5 msec or more
ENG SPEED More than 1,500 rpm
Selector lever Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
SEC011C
DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL
EC-463
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Overall Function Check ABS0094U
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop control. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 [HO2S1 (B1)
signal] or 16 [HO2S1 (B2) signal] and ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no-load.
●The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
●The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
4. If NG, go to EC-463, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0094V
Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0133, P0153. Refer to EC-217, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB1107E
EC-464
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT PFP:47850
Description ABS008A8
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from VDC/
TCS/ABS control unit to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but
also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008A9
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008AA
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds.
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-464, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008AB
Go to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1211
1211 TCS control unit ECM receives a malfunction information from
VDC/TCS/ABS control unit.
●VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
●TCS related parts
SEF058Y
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
EC-465
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:47850
Description ABS008AC
NOTE:
If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and VDC/TCS/ABS control unit.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for VDC/TCS/ABS control unit but
also for ECM after TCS related repair.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008AD
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-
diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008AE
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
4. If a 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-465, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008AF
1. CHECK VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT FUNCTION
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1212
1212
TCS communication
line
ECM can not receive the information
from VDC/TCS/ABS control unit continu-
ously.
●Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
●Dead (Weak) battery
SEF058Y
EC-466
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS) PFP:00000
Description ABS0094E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000
or U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Cooling Fan Control
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [High/Low/Off].
Cooling Fan Operation
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
Cooling fan
control
IPDM E/R
(Cooling fan relays)
Battery Battery voltage*1
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
PBIB1036E
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
EC-467
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS0094F
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS0094G
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
Cooling fan speed Cooling fan relay
13
Stop OFF OFF
Low OFF ON
High ON ON
Cooling fan speed Cooling fan motor terminals
(+) (−)
Low 1 or 2 3 and 4
High 1 and 2 3 and 4
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
AIR COND SIG ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.) ON
COOLING FAN
●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
(212°F) or more HI
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1217
1217
Engine over tempera-
ture (Overheat)
●Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
heat).
●Cooling fan system does not operate prop-
erly (Overheat).
●Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method.
●Engine coolant is not within the specified
range.
●Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Cooling fan
●Radiator hose
●Radiator
●Radiator cap
●Water pump
●Thermostat
●Cooling fan (crankshaft driven)
For more information, refer to EC-477,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
EC-468
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-10, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-10, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check ABS0094H
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-472,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-472,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates nor-
mally.
If NG, refer to CO-22, "COOLING FAN" .
If OK, go to the following step.
5. Stop engine and turn ignition switch ON.
6. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
7. If the results are NG, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-472,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-472,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates nor-
mally.
If NG, refer to CO-22, "COOLING FAN" .
SEF621W
SEF646X
SEF621W
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
EC-469
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
If OK, go to the following step.
5. Turn air condition switch ON.
6. Turn blower fan switch ON.
7. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
If NG, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to the following step.
8. Turn ignition switch OFF.
9. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
10. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
11. Connect 150Ω resister to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
12. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
13. If NG, go to EC-472, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
PBIB2214E
SEF882V
EC-470
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
Wiring Diagram ABS0094I
TBWT0672E
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
EC-471
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TBWT0673E
EC-472
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS0094J
1. CHECK COOLING FAN (CRANKSHAFT DRIVEN)
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Make sure that cooling fan (crankshaft driven) operates normally.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
OK (without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
NG >> Check cooling fan (crankshaft driven). Refer to CO-22, "COOLING FAN" .
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
475, "PROCEDURE A" .)
3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Touch “HIGH” on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low
speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
476, "PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF784Z
SEF785Z
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
EC-473
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
3. Turn blower fan switch ON.
4. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
475, "PROCEDURE A" .)
5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
476, "PROCEDURE B" .)
6. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 3,
4 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB2214E
SEF882V
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1004E
EC-474
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E54, E55
●Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Check the following for leak
●Hose
●Radiator
●Water pump
Refer to CO-26, "WATER PUMP" .
9. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
10. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature.
For details, refer to CO-32, "WATER INLET AND THERMO-
STAT ASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace thermostat.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
SLC754A
Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
, 9 - 14 psi)
SLC755A
Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 8.6 mm/95°C
(0.339 in/203°F)
SLC949A
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
EC-475
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
11. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-185, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
12. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-477, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E6.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 16 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●40A fusible link
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E5 and E9.
3. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 2 and IPDM E/R terminal 8,
cooling fan motor terminal 3 and ground,
cooling fan motor terminal 4 and ground,
IPDM E/R terminal 54 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0966E
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1004E
EC-476
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E55, E54
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ground
●Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
Refer to EC-477, "COOLING FAN MOTOR" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E6 and E9.
4. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 11,
IPDM E/R terminal 54 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
Refer to EC-477, "COOLING FAN MOTOR" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motor.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1004E
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR A/T MODELS)
EC-477
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ABS0094K
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection ABS0094L
COOLING FAN MOTOR
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ●Blocked radiator
●Blocked condenser
●Blocked radiator grille
●Blocked bumper
●Visual No blocking —
2●Coolant mixture ●Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-10
3●Coolant level ●Visual Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and radi-
ator filler neck
CO-10
4●Radiator cap ●Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
CO-16
ON*25●Coolant leaks ●Visual No leaks CO-10
ON*26●Thermostat ●Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot CO-32
ON*17●Cooling fan ●CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-466 ).
OFF 8 ●Combustion gas leak ●Color checker chemical
tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative —
ON*39●Coolant temperature
gauge
●Visual Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
●Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
●Visual No overflow during driving
and idling
CO-10
OFF*410 ●Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radia-
tor
●Visual Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
CO-10
OFF 11 ●Cylinder head ●Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi-
mum distortion (warping)
EM-92
12 ●Cylinder block and pis-
tons
●Visual No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
EM-110
Speed terminals
(+) (−)
Cooling fan motor Low 1 or 2 3 and 4
High 1 and 2 3 and 4
SEF734W
EC-478
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS) PFP:00000
Description ABS008AG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
NOTE:
If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
Cooling Fan Control
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line.
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
Cooling Fan Operation
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1
Cooling fan
control
IPDM E/R
(Cooling fan relays)
Battery Battery voltage*1
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
PBIB1103E
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
EC-479
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R through CAN communication line.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Cooling Fan Motor
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as follows.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008AH
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008AI
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
Cooling fan speed Cooling fan relay
123
Stop OFF OFF OFF
Low ON OFF OFF
High ON ON ON
Cooling fan speed Cooling fan motor terminals
(+) (−)
Low 13
24
High 1 and 2 3 and 4
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
AIR COND SIG ●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.) ON
COOLING FAN
●Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
(201°F) or less OFF
Engine coolant temperature is
between 95°C (203°F) and 99°C
(210°F)
LOW
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
(212°F) or more HI
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1217
1217
Engine over tempera-
ture (Overheat)
●Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
heat).
●Cooling fan system does not operate prop-
erly (Overheat).
●Engine coolant was not added to the system
using the proper filling method.
●Engine coolant is not within the specified
range.
●Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Cooling fan
●Radiator hose
●Radiator
●Radiator cap
●Water pump
●Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-489,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
EC-480
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-10, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-10, "Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check ABS008AJ
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-484,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-484,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-484,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-484,
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
3. Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
5. Turn blower fan switch ON.
SEF621W
SEF646X
SEF621W
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
EC-481
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
If NG, go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to the following step.
7. Turn ignition switch OFF.
8. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
9. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
10. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
11. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
12. If NG, go to EC-484, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEC163BA
MEC475B
EC-482
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
Wiring Diagram ABS008AK
TBWT0670E
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
EC-483
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TBWT0671E
EC-484
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008AL
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
487, "PROCEDURE A" .)
3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
1. Touch “HIGH” on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed
than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
488, "PROCEDURE B" .)
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Turn air conditioner switch ON.
3. Turn blower fan switch ON.
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
487, "PROCEDURE A" .)
SEF784Z
SEF785Z
SEC163BA
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
EC-485
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper-
ate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
488, "PROCEDURE B" .)
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "LEAK
CHECK" .
●Hose
●Radiator
●Water pump
7. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
MEC475B
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
SLC754A
Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2
, 9 - 14 psi)
SLC755A
EC-486
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
8. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature.
For details, refer to CO-32, "WATER INLET AND THERMO-
STAT ASSEMBLY" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace thermostat
9. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-185, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
10. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-489, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END
Valve opening temperature: 76.5°C (170°F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 8.6 mm/90°C
(0.339 in/194°F)
SLC949A
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
EC-487
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E6.
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals 15, 16 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●40A fusible links
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling
fan motor-2 harness connector.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E5.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-1 terminal
2 and IPDM E/R terminal 11, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3 and
ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor-2 terminal
2 and IPDM E/R terminal 10, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-489, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1924E
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1283E
EC-488
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
PROCEDURE B
1. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling
fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E5 and E6.
4. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 8,
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 9,
IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
6. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 13,
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and IPDM E/R terminal 12,
IPDM E/R terminal 14 and ground.
Refer to wiring diagram.
7. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
Refer to EC-489, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Perform EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MOD-
ULE ENGINE ROOM)" .
NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1283E
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE (FOR M/T MODELS)
EC-489
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Main 12 Causes of Overheating ABS008AM
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
Component Inspection ABS008AN
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Cooling fan motor should operate.
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ●Blocked radiator
●Blocked condenser
●Blocked radiator grille
●Blocked bumper
●Visual No blocking —
2●Coolant mixture ●Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-10
3●Coolant level ●Visual Coolant up to MAX level
in reservoir tank and radi-
ator filler neck
CO-10
4●Radiator cap ●Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa
(0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14
psi) (Limit)
CO-16
ON*25●Coolant leaks ●Visual No leaks CO-10
ON*26●Thermostat ●Touch the upper and
lower radiator hoses
Both hoses should be hot CO-32
ON*17●Cooling fan ●CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for
DTC P1217 (EC-478 ).
OFF 8 ●Combustion gas leak ●Color checker chemical
tester 4 Gas analyzer
Negative —
ON*39●Coolant temperature
gauge
●Visual Gauge less than 3/4
when driving
—
●Coolant overflow to
reservoir tank
●Visual No overflow during driving
and idling
CO-10
OFF*410 ●Coolant return from
reservoir tank to radia-
tor
●Visual Should be initial level in
reservoir tank
CO-10
OFF 11 ●Cylinder head ●Straight gauge feeler
gauge
0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi-
mum distortion (warping)
EM-92
12 ●Cylinder block and pis-
tons
●Visual No scuffing on cylinder
walls or piston
EM-110
Speed terminals
(+) (−)
Cooling fan motor Low 13
24
High 1 and 2 3 and 4
SEF734W
EC-490
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS008AO
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008AP
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008AQ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-491, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB0145E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1225
1225
Closed throttle position
learning performance
problem
Closed throttle position learning value is exces-
sively low.
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
SEF058Y
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
EC-491
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008AR
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation ABS008AS
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
PBIB1015E
EC-492
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS008AT
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008AU
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008AV
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-493, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
PBIB0145E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1226
1226
Closed throttle position
learning performance
problem
Closed throttle position learning is not per-
formed successfully, repeatedly.
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
SEF058Y
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
EC-493
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008AW
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake air duct.
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Removal and Installation ABS008AX
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
PBIB1015E
EC-494
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008AY
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008AZ
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-496, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis
name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1229
1229
Sensor power supply
circuit short
ECM detects a voltage of power source for
sensor is excessively low or high.
●Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
shorted.)
(EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
is shorted.)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
●Power steering pressure sensor
●Refrigerant pressure sensor
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
SEF058Y
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
EC-495
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS008B0
TBWB0074E
EC-496
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008B1
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
48 B/Y
Sensor power supply
(EVAP control system pres-
sure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
49 W/L
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
68 Y
Sensor power supply
(Power steering pressure
sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
90 BR/Y Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
PBIB2192E
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
EC-497
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between following terminals.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following.
●EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-352 .)
●Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-395 .)
●Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to ATC-90 .)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-559, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0996E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0914E
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-349
49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-392
68 PSP sensor terminal 1 EC-608
90 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-556
EC-498
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-499
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
PFP:14920
Description ABS008B2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008B3
Specification data are reference values.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed *1
EVAP canister
purge flow control
EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Battery Battery voltage*1
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Wheel sensor*2Vehicle speed
SEF337U
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PURG VOL C/V
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 0%
2,000 rpm —
EC-500
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008B4
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008B5
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”.
6. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take
approximately 10 seconds.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2.
7. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-
503, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds.
4. Select “MODE 7” with GST.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-503, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1444
1444
EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid
valve
The canister purge flow is detected during the
specified driving conditions, even when EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
completely closed.
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
●EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
(The valve is stuck open.)
●EVAP canister vent control valve
●EVAP canister
●Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or
clogged.)
PBIB0839E
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-501
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS008B6
TBWT0660E
EC-502
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
45 L/Y EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve
[Engine is running]
●Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine).
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEC990C
SEC991C
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-503
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008B7
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●IPDM E/R harness connector E7
●Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
●Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1001E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0148E
Continuity should exist.
EC-504
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine.
4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-506, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING
1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
Water should not exist.
PBIB0147E
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EC-505
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 13.
11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●EVAP canister for damage
●EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
13. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Clean or replace water separator.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB1031E
EC-506
DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Component Inspection ABS008B8
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Removal and Installation ABS008B9
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Condition
(PURG VOL CONT/V value)
Air passage continuity
between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Condition Air passage continuity
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2 Yes
No supply No
PBIB0150E
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-507
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE PFP:14935
Component Description ABS008BA
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canis-
ter and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the
ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative
emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evapo-
rative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP
Control System diagnosis.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008BB
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008BC
SEF381Z
PBIB1002E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
VENT CONT/V ●Ignition switch: ON OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1446
1446
EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve close
EVAP canister vent control valve remains
closed under specified driving conditions.
●EVAP canister vent control valve
●EVAP control system pressure sensor
and the circuit
●Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister
vent control valve
●Water separator
●EVAP canister is saturated with water
EC-508
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008BD
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute.
5. Repeat next procedures 3 times.
a. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it
for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes.
Never exceed 3 minutes.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about
5 seconds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-510, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step.
7. Repeat next procedure 20 times.
a. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds.
b. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-510, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
PBIB0972E
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-509
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS008BE
TBWT0661E
EC-510
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008BF
1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve.
3. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower.
2. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Clean or replace water separator.
3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-512, "EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
117 GY/L EVAP canister vent control
valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PBIB1002E
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-511
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> GO TO 7.
5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●EVAP canister for damage
●EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection
>> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister.
7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector.
2. Check connectors for water.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
PBIB1031E
Water should not exist.
EC-512
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Inspection ABS008BG
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
3. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
7. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
8. Perform step 6 again.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister.
2. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being
rusted.
3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
following conditions.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Operation takes less than 1 second.
If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve.
If OK, go to next step.
4. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower.
PBIB1033E
Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B
ON No
OFF Yes
PBIB0151E
PBIB1033E
Condition Air passage continuity between A and B
12V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2 No
OFF Yes
PBIB1034E
DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
EC-513
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. Perform step 3 again.
EC-514
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
Component Description ABS008BH
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for
each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines
which button is operated.
Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008BI
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008BJ
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-396.
PBIB1006E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
MAIN SW ●Ignition switch: ON ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed ON
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Released OFF
CANCEL SW ●Ignition switch: ON CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACC SW ●Ignition switch: ON ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed ON
ACCEL/RESUME switch: Released OFF
SET SW ●Ignition switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis
Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P1564
1564
ASCD steering
switch
●An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM.
●ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD
steering switch is out of the specified range.
●ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is
stuck ON.
●Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
●ASCD steering switch
●ECM
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
EC-515
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008BK
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press ON/OFF (MAIN) switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press ACCEL/RESUME switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. If DTC is detected, go to EC-517, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
EC-516
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Wiring Diagram ABS008BL
TBWT0675E
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
EC-517
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008BM
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●ASCD steering switch: OFF Approximately 4V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: Pressed. Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●CANCEL switch: Pressed. Approximately 1V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●COAST/SET switch: Pressed. Approximately 2V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●ACCEL/RESUME switch: Pressed. Approximately 3V
PBIB2192E
EC-518
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press-
ing each button.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M203.
4. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal
15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
ON/OFF (MAIN)
switch MAIN SW Pressed ON
Released OFF
COAST/SET switch SET SW Pressed ON
Released OFF
ACCEL/RESUME
switch RESUME/ACC SW Pressed ON
Released OFF
CANCEL switch CANCEL SW Pressed ON
Released OFF
SEC006D
Switch Condition Voltage [V]
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch Pressed Approx. 0
Released Approx. 4
COAST/SET switch Pressed Approx. 2
Released Approx. 4
ACCEL/RESUME switch Pressed Approx. 3
Released Approx. 4
CANCEL switch Pressed Approx. 1
Released Approx. 4
PBIB0311E
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1006E
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
EC-519
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Combination switch (spiral cable)
●Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Combination switch (spiral cable)
●Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-519, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace steering wheel.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008BN
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable).
2. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) ter-
minals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch.
Continuity should exist.
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch Pressed Approx. 0
Released Approx. 4,000
COAST/SET switch Pressed Approx. 660
Released Approx. 4,000
ACCEL/RESUME switch Pressed Approx. 1,480
Released Approx. 4,000 PBIB0967E
EC-520
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
CANCEL switch Pressed Approx. 250
Released Approx. 4,000
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-521
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description ABS008BO
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008BP
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008BQ
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-396
PBIB1282E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
BRAKE SW 1
(ASCD brake switch) ●Ignition switch: ON
●Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake
pedal: Fully released ON
●Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or
brake pedal: Slightly
depressed
OFF
BRAKE SW 2
(stop lamp switch) ●Ignition switch: ON ●Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
●Brake pedal: Depressed ON
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis
Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P1572
1572 ASCD brake switch
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19
MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch
and the ASCD brake switch are sent to the
ECM at the same time.
●Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Harness or connectors
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Stop lamp switch
●ASCD brake switch
●Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
●Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
●ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
●Incorrect ASCD clutch switch installation (M/T
models)
●ECM
EC-522
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008BR
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-527, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
Driving location
Depress the brake pedal for more than
five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-523
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS0094W
A/T MODELS
TBWT0677E
EC-524
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
108 SB ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-525
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
M/T MODELS
TBWT0676E
EC-526
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
108 SB ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are
depressed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully
released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-527
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008BT
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depressed OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
SEC011D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
EC-528
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
MBIB0060E
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-529
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1005E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0857E
Continuity should exist.
EC-530
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB1005E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1804E
Continuity should exist.
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-531
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E108, M15
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-532
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed OFF
When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released ON
SEC011D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-533
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 11.
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
MBIB0060E
PBIB1282E
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Battery voltage
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
PBIB0799E
EC-534
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
PBIB1282E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0857E
Continuity should exist.
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-535
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
11. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1282E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1804E
EC-536
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E108, M15
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-537, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-537
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS008BU
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch termi-
nals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,
"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
SEC023D
Condition Continuity
When clutch pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When clutch pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
SEC024D
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
PBIB1805E
EC-538
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
Component Description ABS008BV
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina-
tion meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008BW
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
NOTE:
●If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
●If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500.
Refer to EC-385, "DTC P0500 VSS"
●If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-396, "DTC P0605 ECM"
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008BX
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-539, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis
Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P1574
1574
ASCD vehicle speed
sensor
ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified range.
●Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
●Combination meter
●VDC/TCS/ABS control unit
●Wheel sensor
●TCM
●ECM
SEF058Y
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
EC-539
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008BY
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-38 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK DTC WITH VDC/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT
Refer to BRC-10, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-540
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
Component Description ABS008BZ
When the gear position is P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008C0
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008C1
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008C2
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow-
ing conditions.
If NG, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
P/N POSI SW ●Ignition switch: ON Shift lever: P or N (A/T), Neutral (M/T) ON
Shift lever: Except above OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1706
1706
Park/neutral position
switch
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.
●Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
circuit is open or shorted.]
●Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
●Combination meter (A/T models)
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
P or N position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T) ON
Except the above position OFF
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6375 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 2.0 - 31.8 msec
VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position
SEF212Y
SEF213Y
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
EC-541
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Overall Function Check ABS008C3
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH GST
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal)
and ground under the following conditions.
3. If NG, go to EC-545, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)
P or N position (A/T)
Neutral position (M/T) Approx. 0
Except the above position BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
MBIB0043E
EC-542
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
Wiring Diagram ABS0094X
A/T MODELS
TBWT0679E
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
EC-543
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
102 G/OR PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Shift lever: P or N Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-544
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
M/T MODELS
TBWT0678E
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
EC-545
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008C5
A/T MODELS
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “A/T”, then “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “P/N POSI SW” signal and check its indication under the
following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH SIGNAL
Without CONSULT-II
Confirm that the PNP switch signal is sent to TCM correctly.
Refer to AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Check the PNP switch circuit.
Refer to AT-112, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" .
>> INSPECTION END
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
102 G/OR PNP switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Shift lever: Neutral Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Condition (Gear position) P/N POSI SW
P or N position ON
Other position OFF
PBIB0102E
EC-546
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 48 and combination meter terminal 15.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between TCM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Check harness continuity between combination meter terminal 45 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 12.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
EC-547
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
10. CHECK COMBINATION METER
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace combination meter
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F102, M72
●Harness for open or short between PNP switch and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH
Refer to MT-12, "POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-548
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
EC-549
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Description ABS008C6
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008C7
Specification data are reference values.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008C8
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode.
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008C9
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
4. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-551, "Diagnostic Procedure"
.
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
BRAKE SW ●Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P1805
1805 Brake switch A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an
extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
●Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Stop lamp switch
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
SEF058Y
EC-550
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram ABS008CA
TBWT0680E
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
EC-551
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008CB
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Depressed Illuminated
PBIB1282E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1804E
EC-552
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●10A fuse
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop
lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E108, M15
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-553, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1282E
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
EC-553
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS008CC
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
PBIB1805E
EC-554
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description ABS008CD
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008CE
Specification data are reference values.
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008CF
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229.
Refer to EC-494 .
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
PBIB1741E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ACCEL SEN1 ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V
ACCEL SEN2* ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
CLSD THL POS ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P2122
2122
Accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor 1 circuit low
input
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
sor 1 is sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1)
P2123
2123
Accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor 1 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
sor 1 is sent to ECM.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
EC-555
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008CG
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-556
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS008CH
TBWT0417E
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
EC-557
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008CI
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
82 GY/L Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83 B/R Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90 BR/Y Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.60V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
1.95 - 2.40V
106 BR Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
PBIB2192E
EC-558
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB0996E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0914E
Continuity should exist.
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
EC-559
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-559, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008CJ
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
Continuity should exist.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
Fully released 0.15 - 0.60V
Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V
MBIB0023E
EC-560
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
5. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation ABS008CK
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
EC-561
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description ABS008CL
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008CM
Specification data are reference values.
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008CN
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
PBIB1741E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ACCEL SEN1 ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V
ACCEL SEN2* ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
CLSD THL POS ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P2127
2127
Accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor 2 circuit low
input
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
sor 2 is sent to ECM.
●Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
P2128
2128
Accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor 2 circuit high
input
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
sor 2 is sent to ECM.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-562
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008CO
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-564, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
EC-563
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS008CP
TBWB0075E
EC-564
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008CQ
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 B Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
82 GY/L Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83 B/R Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90 BR/Y Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.60V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
1.95 - 2.40V
106 BR Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
PBIB2192E
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
EC-565
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB0996E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0915E
Continuity should exist.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-563
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-570
EC-566
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-574, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
EC-567
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
12. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008CR
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
5. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation ABS008CS
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
Fully released 0.15 - 0.60V
Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V
MBIB0023E
EC-568
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description ABS008CT
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
tion.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008CU
Specification data are reference values.
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008CV
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
PBIB0145E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*
●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P2135
2135
Throttle position sensor
circuit range/perfor-
mance problem
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
and TP sensor 2.
●Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 2)
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
EC-569
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008CW
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
EC-570
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS008CX
TBWB0076E
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
EC-571
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008CY
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 B Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
50 W Throttle position sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
More than 0.36V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Less than 4.75V
66 W/R Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
69 R/L Throttle position sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully released
Less than 4.75V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Shift lever: D (A/T), 1st (M/T)
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
More than 0.36V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
PBIB2192E
EC-572
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal
1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and ECM terminal 47.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace open circuit.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0995E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0082E
Continuity should exist.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-570
91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-563
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
EC-573
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and ECM terminal 66.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-574, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-574
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Inspection ABS008CZ
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Set selector lever to D (A/T), 1st (M/T) position.
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal),
69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following condi-
tions.
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next
step.
7. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
8. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation ABS008D0
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EM-18, "INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR" .
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
50
(Throttle position sensor 1)
Fully released More than 0.36V
Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
69
(Throttle position sensor 2)
Fully released Less than 4.75V
Fully depressed More than 0.36V
PBIB1170E
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
EC-575
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description ABS008D1
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008D2
Specification data are reference values.
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage.
On Board Diagnosis Logic ABS008D3
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to
EC-494.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
PBIB1741E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ACCEL SEN1 ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.7V
ACCEL SEN2* ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.3 - 1.2V
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
CLSD THL POS ●Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
P2138
2138
Accelerator pedal posi-
tion sensor circuit
range/performance
problem
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
and APP sensor 2.
●Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
●Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1 and 2)
●Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-576
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC Confirmation Procedure ABS008D4
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-578, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
WITH GST
Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above.
SEF058Y
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
EC-577
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Wiring Diagram ABS008D5
TBWB0077E
EC-578
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008D6
1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen and retighten two ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-138, "Ground Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair or replace ground connections.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
47 B Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
82 GY/L Sensor ground
(APP sensor 1)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
83 B/R Sensor ground
(APP sensor 2)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
90 BR/Y Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
91 G Sensor power supply
(APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
98 LG/B Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.15 - 0.60V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
1.95 - 2.40V
106 BR Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully released
0.5 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Engine stopped
●Accelerator pedal fully depressed
3.9 - 4.7V
PBIB2192E
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
EC-579
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0996E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0914E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0915E
EC-580
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 91.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair or replace open circuit.
7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Refer to EC-574, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
2. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram
91 APP sensor terminal 4 EC-577
47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-570
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
EC-581
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
10. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83, APP sensor terminal 3
and ECM terminal 82.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK APP SENSOR
Refer to EC-582, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-582
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
15. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
2. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning"
3. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning"
4. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning"
>> INSPECTION END
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008D7
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following
conditions.
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.
5. Perform EC-42, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
6. Perform EC-42, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
7. Perform EC-42, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Removal and Installation ABS008D8
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-3, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
106
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)
Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V
98
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)
Fully released 0.15 - 0.60V
Fully depressed 1.95 - 2.40V
MBIB0023E
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-583
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description ABS008D9
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
PBIB1007E
EC-584
IGNITION SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram ABS008DA
TBWT0682E
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-585
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
111 W ECM relay
(Self shut-off)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: OFF]
●More than a few seconds after turning igni-
tion switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
119
120
P
LPower supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-586
IGNITION SIGNAL
TBWT0462E
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-587
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
60
61
62
PU/W
L/R
Y/R
Ignition signal No. 5
Ignition signal No. 3
Ignition signal No. 1
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
0.1 - 0.4V
SEC986C
SEC987C
EC-588
IGNITION SIGNAL
TBWT0463E
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-589
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008DB
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
79
80
81
GY/R
GY
G/R
Ignition signal No. 6
Ignition signal No. 4
Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,500 rpm.
0.1 - 0.4V
SEC986C
SEC987C
PBIB0133E
EC-590
IGNITION SIGNAL
3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT-II
1. Let engine idle.
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79,
80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope.
3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 10.
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Go to EC-130, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT" .
PBIB1186E
SEC986C
Voltage: Battery voltage
MBIB0034E
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-591
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E7.
3. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E12, F3
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1286E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0624E
Continuity should exist.
EC-592
IGNITION SIGNAL
8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-594, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace condenser.
10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F18, F201
●Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F3
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1007E
PBIB0138E
IGNITION SIGNAL
EC-593
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F18, F201
●Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 62, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F18, F201
●Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
16. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-594, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. refer to PG-16 .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
EC-594
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Inspection ABS008DC
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Removal and Installation ABS008DD
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EM-35, "IGNITION COIL" .
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3 Except 0
2 and 3
PBIB0847E
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
EC-595
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
Component Description ABS008DE
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008DF
Specification data are reference values.
SEF375Z
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
B/FUEL SCHDL
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.5 - 3.5 msec
2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
INJ PULSE-B1
INJ PULSE-B2
●Engine: After warming up
●Shift lever: N (A/T), Neutral (M/T)
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●No-load
Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
EC-596
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram ABS008DG
TBWT0301E
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
EC-597
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
21
22
23
G
R/Y
R/B
Injector No. 5
Injector No. 3
Injector No. 1
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
40
41
42
P
R/L
R/W
Injector No. 6
Injector No. 4
Injector No. 2
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at
idle.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
SEC984C
SEC985C
SEC984C
SEC985C
EC-598
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008DH
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0133E
PBIB1986E
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
EC-599
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness connectors F33, F221
●Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
PBIB0997E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0582E
Continuity should exist.
EC-600
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors F33, F221
●Harness for open or short between injector and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK INJECTOR
Refer to EC-600, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace injector.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection ABS008DI
INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Removal and Installation ABS008DJ
INJECTOR
Refer to EM-38, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
EC-601
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
Description ABS008DK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine start-
ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that
the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008DL
Specification data are reference values.
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery Battery voltage*
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
PBIB1011E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
FUEL PUMP RLY
●For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
●Engine running or cranking ON
●Except above conditions OFF
EC-602
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram ABS008DM
TBWT0683E
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
EC-603
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008DN
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
113 B/OR Fuel pump relay
[Ignition switch: ON]
●For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●More than 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
PBIB1020E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1187E
EC-604
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 40 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 13.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair harness or connectors.
5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK 15A FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15A fuse.
3. Check 15A fuse.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace fuse.
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1926E
Voltage: Battery voltage should exist for 1 sec-
ond after ignition switch is turned ON.
PBIB0624E
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
EC-605
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E8.
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 39 and condenser terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E106, B2
●Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
>> Repair harness or connectors.
9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace condenser.
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and
fuel pump” terminal 1 and harness connector B2 terminal 18,
“fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB0994E
EC-606
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
12. CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Component Inspection ABS008DO
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 1 and 3.
CONDENSER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
Removal and Installation ABS008DP
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" .
Resistance: Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
SEC918C
Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
PBIB0794E
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-607
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
Component Description ABS008DQ
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the
air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB1009E
SEF099XA
EC-608
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Wiring Diagram ABS008DR
TBWT0684E
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-609
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008DS
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
49 W/L
Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sen-
sor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V
67 B/W Sensor ground
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Idle speed
Approximately 0V
70 R/B Refrigerant pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
●Warm-up condition
●Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
(Compressor operates.)
1.0 - 4.0V
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
PBIB1188E
EC-610
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1009E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
PBIB0188E
Continuity should exist.
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
EC-611
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E11, F2
●Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
NG >> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation ABS008DT
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to ATC-151, "Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" .
Continuity should exist.
EC-612
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
Description ABS008DU
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred
through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008DV
Specification data are reference values.
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008DW
1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following
conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to GW-94, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to LT-7, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-39, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYS-
TEM -" .
>> INSPECTION END
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
LOAD SIGNAL ●Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd. ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
and lighting switch is OFF. OFF
Condition Indication
Rear window defogger switch ON ON
Rear window defogger switch OFF OFF
PBIB0103E
Condition Indication
Lighting switch ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch OFF OFF
PBIB0103E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-613
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description ABS008DX
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned
OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008DY
Specification data are reference values.
PBIB1282E
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
BRAKE SW 1
(ASCD brake switch) ●Ignition switch: ON
●Clutch pedal (M/T) and brake
pedal: Fully released ON
●Clutch pedal (M/T) and/or
brake pedal: Slightly
depressed
OFF
BRAKE SW 2
(stop lamp switch) ●Ignition switch: ON ●Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
●Brake pedal: Depressed ON
EC-614
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram ABS0094Y
A/T MODELS
TBWT0686E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-615
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
108 SB ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-616
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
M/T MODELS
TBWT0685E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-617
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
MINAL
NO.
WIRE
COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
101 P/L Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is fully released Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal is depressed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
108 SB ASCD brake switch
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are
depressed
Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch: ON]
●Brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully
released
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
EC-618
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008E0
A/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depressed OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
SEC011D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-619
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 8.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
MBIB0060E
EC-620
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
PBIB1005E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0857E
Continuity should exist.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-621
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB1005E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1804E
Continuity should exist.
EC-622
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E108, M15
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-623
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
M/T MODELS
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the
following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed OFF
When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released ON
SEC011D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal and/or clutch pedal are depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal and clutch pedal are fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
EC-624
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or
tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
MBIB0060E
PBIB1282E
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Battery voltage
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
PBIB0799E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-625
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminal 2 and ASCD clutch switch terminal 1.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
PBIB1282E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB0857E
Continuity should exist.
EC-626
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
8. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ECM terminal 108.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E10, F1
●Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD clutch switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch.
11. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
Continuity should exist.
PBIB1282E
Voltage: Battery voltage
PBIB1804E
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
EC-627
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Fuse block (J/B) connector E101
●10A fuse
●Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
●Harness connectors E108, M15
●Harness connectors M72, F102
●Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-628, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
Continuity should exist.
EC-628
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection ABS008E1
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch termi-
nals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,
"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1
and 2 under the following conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6,
"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
SEC023D
Condition Continuity
When clutch pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When clutch pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
SEC024D
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
PBIB1805E
ASCD INDICATOR
EC-629
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
Component Description ABS008E2
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when ON/OFF (MAIN) switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated
that ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
●CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
●SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD set-
ting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-649, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ABS008E3
Specification data are reference value.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CRUISE LAMP ●Ignition switch: ON
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch:
Pressed at the 1st time → at
the 2nd time
ON → OFF
SET LAMP
●ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: ON
●When vehicle speed is
between 40 km/h (25 MPH)
and 144 km/h (89MPH)
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
EC-630
ASCD INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram ABS008E4
TBWT0305E
ASCD INDICATOR
EC-631
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008E5
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE" .
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
Does combination meter operate normally?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-129, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CRUISE LAMP ●Ignition switch: ON
ON/OFF (MAIN) switch:
Pressed at the 1st time → at
the 2nd time
ON → OFF
SET LAMP
●ON/OFF (MAIN) switch: ON
●When vehicle speed is
between 40 km/h (25 MPH)
and 144 km/h (89MPH)
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
EC-632
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
Wiring Diagram ABS008E6
TBWT0439E
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
EC-633
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
TBWT0687E
EC-634
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
Description ABS008E7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
PBIB1685E
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EC-635
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
PBIB1022E
EC-636
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PBIB1023E
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EC-637
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Inspection ABS008E8
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B .
2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C .
3. Release blocked port B .
4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pres-
sure exists at the ports A and C .
5. Block port A and B .
6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage.
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor-
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-335 .
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-278 .
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Refer to EC-342 .
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-352 .
PBIB1044E
SEF445Y
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2 , 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 ,
−0.87 to −0.48 psi)
SEF943S
EC-638
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP
service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a
leak detector to locate the leak.
Removal and Installation ABS008E9
EVAP CANISTER
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve.
Do not reuse the O-ring, replace it with a new one.
How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ABS008EA
CAUTION:
●Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
●Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system.
NOTE:
●Do not start engine.
●Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak.
SEF462UA
PBIB1029E
PBIB1030E
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EC-639
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT
MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will
appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure
indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure
pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-635, "EVAP-
ORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP ser-
vice port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port adapter.
PEF838U
PEF917U
SEF200U
SEF462UA
EC-640
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
3. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed
EVAP system.
4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to
2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
5. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump.
6. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-635, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
PBIB1002E
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
EC-641
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) PFP:00032
System Description ABS008EB
From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut
valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is
released to the atmosphere.
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and
refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged
during driving.
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
●Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop.
●Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
●Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION:
●Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
–Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
–Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-44, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
–Disconnect battery ground cable.
●Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
●Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed.
●Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
●After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
PBIB1028E
EC-642
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Diagnostic Procedure ABS008EC
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace water separator.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
PBIB1031E
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
EC-643
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor
attached.
The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 6.
3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER
Replace EVAP canister with a new one.
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK WATER SEPARATOR
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace water separator.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and water separator for clogging or poor connection.
>> Repair or replace EVAP hose.
6. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, loose-
ness and improper connection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
PBIB1031E
EC-644
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
7. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE
Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace filler neck tube.
8. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
Refer to EC-644, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
9. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE
Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube.
10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I
Check one-way valve for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
11. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II
1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing
stick it should close.
Do not drop any material into the tank.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve
with fuel tank.
Component Inspection ABS008ED
WATER SEPARATOR
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
SEF665U
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
EC-645
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
4. Check that A and C are not clogged by blowing air into B with
A , and then C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
Do not disassemble water separator.
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" .
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-11, "FUEL TANK" .
2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
PBIB1032E
PBIB1035E
EC-646
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that
the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable.
PBIB1035E
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
EC-647
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
Description ABS008EE
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
Component Inspection ABS008EF
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
SEC921C
PBIB1588E
PBIB1589E
EC-648
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
EC-649
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930
System Description ABS008EG
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
*: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press ON/OFF (MAIN) switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press COAST/SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
●CANCEL switch is depressed
●More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
●Brake pedal is depressed
●Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to the neutral position (M/T models)
●Selector lever is changed to N, R, P position (A/T models)
●Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
●VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
●Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing COAST/SET switch or ACCEL/
RESUME switch.
●Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If ON/OFF (MAIN) switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled
and vehicle speed memory will be erased.
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control
actuator
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch Clutch pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Park/Neutral position (PNP)
switch Gear position
Combination meter* Vehicle speed
TCM* Powertrain revolution
EC-650
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
COAST OPERATION
When the COAST/SET switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the ACCEL/RESUME switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing ON/OFF (MAIN)
switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition
must meet following conditions.
●Brake pedal is released
●Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
●A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions (A/T models)
●Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
EC-651
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Component Description ABS008EH
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Refer to EC-514 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-521 , and EC-613 .
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-521 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-521 , EC-549 and EC-613 .
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Refer to EC-410 , EC-412 , EC-418 and EC-423 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-629 .
EC-652
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
Fuel Pressure ABS008EI
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ABS0094Z
*: Under the following conditions:
●Air conditioner switch: OFF
●Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
●Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value ABS008EK
Mass Air Flow Sensor ABS008EL
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ABS008EM
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ABS008EN
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ABS008EO
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater ABS008EP
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ABS008EQ
Refer to EC-302, "Component Inspection" .
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ABS008ER
Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection" .
Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.57, 51)
Target idle speed A/T No-load* (in P or N position) 650±50 rpm
M/T No-load* (in Neutral position)
Air conditioner: ON A/T In P or N position 775 rpm or more
M/T In Neutral position
Ignition timing A/T In P or N position 15° ± 5° BTDC
M/T In Neutral position
Conditions Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST)
At idle 5 - 35
At 2,500 rpm 5 - 35
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)
Output voltage at idle 0.9 - 1.2*V
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
7.0 - 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 0.295 - 0.349
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
EC-653
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
EC
Throttle Control Motor ABS008ES
Injector ABS008ET
Fuel Pump ABS008EU
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 13.5 - 17.5Ω
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 0.2 - 5.0Ω
EC-654
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Navigation menu